1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or
3365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3370 style only that one time.
3371 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3373 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3391 manual for information on how to use it.
3394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3399 Each class has a default set of options.
3400 Here's a quick table describing them:
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3410 \begin_layout Standard
3412 \begin_inset Tabular
3413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3414 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3880 \begin_layout Standard
3881 You're probably also wondering what
3882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3886 \begin_inset space ~
3890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3894 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3895 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3900 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3905 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3915 headings, there are also
3923 headings, and so on.
3924 We will describe these headings fully in section
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3931 reference "subsec:Headings"
3938 \begin_layout Subsection
3940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3942 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3957 \begin_inset Index idx
3960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 \begin_layout Standard
3970 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3994 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3995 doesn't support special options you want to
3996 use for your document.
3997 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3998 -class and its options, you have to read
4002 \begin_layout Standard
4006 \begin_inset space ~
4013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4019 \begin_inset space ~
4024 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4025 You can choose between the following five options:
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 Use default page style of current class.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4043 No page numbers or headings.
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 \begin_layout Labeling
4056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4061 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4062 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4063 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4064 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4067 \begin_layout Labeling
4068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4074 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4080 \begin_inset Index idx
4083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4091 How they are defined is explained in section
4092 \begin_inset space ~
4096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4098 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4105 \begin_layout Standard
4106 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4107 \begin_inset space ~
4111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4113 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4120 \begin_layout Subsection
4121 Paper Size and Orientation
4122 \begin_inset Index idx
4125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 Document ! Paper size
4132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4134 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 You can find the following options in the menu
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4156 \begin_inset Index idx
4159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4168 \begin_layout Labeling
4169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4173 \begin_inset space ~
4178 What size paper to print on.
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 US letter, US legal, US executive
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Itemize
4226 \begin_layout Labeling
4227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4232 To choose whether to output as
4243 \begin_layout Labeling
4244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4248 \begin_inset space ~
4253 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4254 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4257 \begin_layout Subsection
4259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4261 name "subsec:Margins"
4266 \begin_inset Index idx
4269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4288 \begin_layout Standard
4289 Paper margins are set in the menu
4291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4295 \begin_inset Index idx
4298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 \begin_layout Standard
4308 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4309 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4310 the paper format and the font size into account.
4313 \begin_layout Subsection
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4318 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4324 That includes the paragraph environments.
4325 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4326 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4327 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4329 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4338 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4340 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4341 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4342 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4345 \begin_layout Section
4346 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4347 \begin_inset Index idx
4350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4351 Paragraph ! Indentation
4359 \begin_layout Subsection
4361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4363 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4372 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4375 \begin_layout Standard
4376 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4377 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4378 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4379 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4383 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4389 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4390 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4391 language than English.
4393 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4396 \begin_layout Standard
4397 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4398 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4399 into \SpecialChar LyX
4401 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4404 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4406 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4407 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4408 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4416 goes to produce a printable file.
4421 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4423 gives you the ability globally to change
4427 these pre-coded spacings.
4428 We will explain more later.
4431 \begin_layout Subsection
4432 Paragraph Separation
4433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4435 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4440 \begin_inset Index idx
4443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4444 Paragraph ! Separation
4452 \begin_layout Standard
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4468 \begin_inset space ~
4475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4488 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4491 \begin_layout Subsection
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 dialog and toggle the
4509 \begin_inset space ~
4514 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4517 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4521 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4522 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4527 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4528 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4531 \begin_layout Subsection
4533 \begin_inset Index idx
4536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4545 \begin_layout Standard
4548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4564 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4568 \begin_inset space ~
4577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4578 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4584 \begin_inset Index idx
4587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 installed to use this feature.
4599 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4601 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4608 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4609 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4612 \begin_layout Section
4613 Paragraph Environments
4614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4616 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4621 \begin_inset Index idx
4624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4625 Paragraph ! Environments
4631 \begin_inset Index idx
4634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4635 Paragraph environments|(
4643 \begin_layout Subsection
4647 \begin_layout Standard
4648 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4651 \begin_layout Standard
4660 } \SpecialChar ldots
4670 \begin_inset Newline newline
4673 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4675 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4676 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4677 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4686 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4689 \begin_layout Standard
4690 A paragraph environment is simply a
4691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4698 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4699 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4700 scheme, labels, and so on.
4701 Additionally, you can
4702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4709 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4710 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4711 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4712 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4714 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4716 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4719 \begin_layout Standard
4720 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4721 \begin_inset Graphics
4722 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4728 at the left end of the toolbar.
4730 will change the environment of the
4734 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4735 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4736 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4749 create a new paragraph using the
4753 paragraph environment.
4755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4762 because if you are in one of these environments:
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Itemize
4807 \begin_layout Standard
4809 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4813 , rather than resetting it to
4818 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4819 \begin_inset space ~
4823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4825 reference "sec:Nesting"
4832 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 The default paragraph environment is
4842 It creates a plain paragraph.
4844 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4845 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4846 this manual) are in the
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 You can nest a paragraph using the
4858 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4866 \begin_layout Subsection
4868 \begin_inset Index idx
4871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4881 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4882 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4891 for thanks or contact information.
4892 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4893 places all of this on a separate page
4894 along with today's date.
4895 For other types of documents, the title
4896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4903 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4907 \begin_layout Standard
4909 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4923 Here's how you use them:
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the title of your document in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 Put the author name in the
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4943 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4944 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4950 Note that using this environment is optional.
4951 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4952 will automatically insert today's date.
4953 If you don't want a date, use the option
4955 Suppress default date on front page
4959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4960 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4962 \begin_inset space ~
4970 \begin_layout Standard
4971 You can use footnotes to insert
4972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4979 or contact information.
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4984 \begin_inset Index idx
4987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4996 name "subsec:Headings"
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5006 takes care of the numbering for you.
5009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5011 \begin_inset Index idx
5014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 Section headings ! Numbered
5023 \begin_layout Standard
5024 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Enumerate
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5072 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5073 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5074 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5077 \begin_layout Standard
5078 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5079 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5080 You group the book into chapters.
5082 does a similar grouping:
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5090 is divided into either
5101 \begin_layout Itemize
5113 \begin_layout Itemize
5125 \begin_layout Itemize
5137 \begin_layout Itemize
5149 \begin_layout Itemize
5161 \begin_layout Standard
5162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5170 Not all document types use the
5174 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5179 is the top-level heading.
5187 \begin_layout Standard
5192 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5193 labels it with its number,
5194 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5196 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5210 \begin_inset Index idx
5213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5214 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5222 \begin_layout Standard
5223 The unnumbered section headings have a
5224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5231 at the end of their name.
5232 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5233 the table of contents, see section
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5248 Changing the Numbering
5249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5259 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5260 in the Table of Contents.
5261 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5263 Just as certain classes start with
5277 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5287 This is something you can change.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5297 \begin_inset Index idx
5300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5309 \begin_inset space ~
5313 \begin_inset space ~
5318 you will see two counters.
5323 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5324 numbers a section heading.
5325 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5330 Short Titles of Headings
5331 \begin_inset Index idx
5334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5335 Section headings ! Short titles
5341 \begin_inset Argument 1
5344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5353 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5362 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5363 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5364 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5369 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5370 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5371 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5372 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5377 \begin_inset space ~
5383 This will insert a box labeled
5384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5388 \begin_inset space ~
5392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5395 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5396 This also works for captions inside floats.
5397 There can only be one short title per title.
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5408 \begin_layout Standard
5409 The following information applies to all section headings:
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5421 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5424 \begin_layout Itemize
5425 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5428 \begin_layout Subsection
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5434 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5448 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5449 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5450 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5451 the text they contain.
5452 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5460 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5463 \begin_layout Standard
5464 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5473 when you start a new paragraph.
5474 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5478 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5479 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5480 have to change back to the
5484 environment yourself.
5487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 \begin_inset Index idx
5499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5510 time for the differences.
5519 are identical except for one difference:
5523 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5532 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5535 \begin_layout Standard
5536 Here's an example of the
5549 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5551 See – no indentation!
5555 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5556 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5557 the other paragraph.
5560 \begin_layout Standard
5561 Here's another example, this time in the
5568 \begin_layout Quotation
5574 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5575 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5576 the first line, then
5580 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5584 you were quoting other text.
5587 \begin_layout Quotation
5588 Here's a new paragraph.
5589 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5590 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5593 \begin_layout Standard
5594 As the examples show,
5598 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5599 They should put quotes in the
5604 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5608 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5613 \begin_inset Index idx
5616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5623 \begin_inset Index idx
5626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5642 \begin_layout Standard
5647 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5656 Which I did not rehearse!
5660 It could be much worse.
5661 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5663 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5664 indented a bit more than the first.
5665 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5671 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 And make things look fine
5675 \begin_inset Newline newline
5681 arg "newline-insert newline"
5687 \begin_layout Standard
5692 does not indent both margins.
5693 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5694 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5697 arg "newline-insert newline"
5703 \begin_layout Subsection
5705 \begin_inset Index idx
5708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5726 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5736 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5737 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5746 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5747 lets you provide your own label.
5748 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5749 describing some general features of all four of them.
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5759 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5760 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5769 reset the environment to
5773 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5774 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5775 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5779 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5783 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5790 \begin_layout Standard
5791 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5792 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5793 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5795 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5796 you read all of section
5797 \begin_inset space ~
5801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5803 reference "sec:Nesting"
5810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5812 \begin_inset Index idx
5815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5831 \begin_layout Standard
5832 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5836 paragraph environment.
5837 It has the following properties:
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5855 \begin_layout Itemize
5856 The items can have any length.
5858 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5859 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 environment inside another
5875 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5883 \begin_layout Itemize
5885 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5888 \begin_layout Itemize
5890 \begin_inset space ~
5894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5896 reference "sec:Nesting"
5900 for a full explanation of nesting.
5904 \begin_layout Standard
5905 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5914 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5917 \begin_layout Standard
5918 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5919 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the first level
5927 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 The label for the second level is a dash.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5941 \begin_layout Itemize
5942 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5946 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 Back out to the third level.
5951 \begin_layout Itemize
5952 Back to the second level.
5956 \begin_layout Itemize
5957 Back to the outermost level.
5960 \begin_layout Standard
5961 These are the default labels for an
5966 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5971 dialog in the submenu
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5985 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5989 \begin_layout Standard
5990 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5991 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5993 \begin_inset space ~
5997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5999 reference "sec:Nesting"
6006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6008 \begin_inset Index idx
6011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6020 name "sec:Enumerate"
6027 \begin_layout Standard
6032 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6033 It has these properties:
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 environment resets the counter to one.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6074 Items can have any length.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6081 \begin_layout Enumerate
6082 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6085 \begin_layout Enumerate
6086 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6099 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6101 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6102 labels the four different levels in an
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The first level of an
6114 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6128 \begin_layout Enumerate
6129 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6138 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 Back to the third level
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6144 Back to the second level.
6148 \begin_layout Enumerate
6149 Back to the outermost level.
6152 \begin_layout Standard
6153 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6157 environment, see section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6169 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6173 \begin_layout Standard
6174 There is more to nesting
6178 environments than we've stated here.
6179 You should read section
6180 \begin_inset space ~
6184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6186 reference "sec:Nesting"
6190 to learn more about nesting.
6193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6195 \begin_inset Index idx
6198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6207 \begin_layout Standard
6208 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6212 list has no fixed label.
6213 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6222 of the first line as the label.
6226 \begin_layout Description
6227 Example: This is an example of the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6240 \begin_layout Standard
6242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6249 it is meant that the first usage of the
6253 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6255 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6263 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_inset space ~
6281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6283 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6287 for more information.) Here is an example:
6290 \begin_layout Description
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6295 Example: This one shows how to use a
6298 \begin_inset space ~
6310 \begin_layout Description
6311 Usage: You should use the
6315 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6316 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6318 It's not a good idea to use a
6322 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6323 You're better off using
6335 paragraphs into them.
6338 \begin_layout Description
6339 Nesting: You can nest
6343 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6348 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6349 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6350 them from the first line.
6353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6355 \begin_inset Index idx
6358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6367 \begin_layout Standard
6372 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6373 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6377 \begin_layout Standard
6386 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6388 Here are its properties:
6391 \begin_layout Labeling
6392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6394 \begin_inset space ~
6397 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6406 of each line as the item label.
6411 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6412 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6413 space as described above.
6416 \begin_layout Labeling
6417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6419 uses different margins for the item label and the
6420 body of the item text.
6421 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6422 label width plus a little extra space.
6426 \begin_layout Labeling
6427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6429 \begin_inset space ~
6432 width \SpecialChar LyX
6433 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6434 If the label width is larger, the label
6435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6442 into the first line.
6443 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6444 margin of the rest of the item text.
6447 \begin_layout Labeling
6448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6453 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6458 environment has the same left margin.
6459 \begin_inset Newline newline
6462 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6467 \begin_inset space ~
6472 dialog (toolbar button
6475 arg "layout-paragraph"
6482 \begin_inset space ~
6487 determines the default label width.
6488 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6497 multiple times instead.
6498 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6508 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6516 every time you alter a label in a
6521 \begin_inset Newline newline
6524 The predefined default width is the length of
6525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6533 \begin_inset space ~
6539 \begin_layout Standard
6544 list the same way as the
6548 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6554 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6558 \begin_layout Standard
6563 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6564 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "sec:Nesting"
6576 to learn about nesting.
6579 \begin_layout Standard
6580 There is yet another feature of the
6584 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6585 left-justifies the item labels by
6587 You can use additional
6591 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6592 justifies the item label.
6597 are documented in section
6598 \begin_inset space ~
6602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6604 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6609 Here are some examples:
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 Left The default for
6621 \begin_layout Labeling
6622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6623 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6633 \begin_layout Labeling
6634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6635 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6646 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6649 \begin_layout Subsection
6651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6653 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6658 \begin_inset Index idx
6661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6670 \begin_layout Standard
6671 The features described in this section require that the module
6673 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6675 is loaded in the document settings.
6676 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6682 \begin_inset Index idx
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6696 Custom Enumerate Lists
6697 \begin_inset Index idx
6700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6701 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6709 \begin_layout Standard
6711 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6717 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6718 There you add the command
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6729 \begin_layout Standard
6741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6742 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6743 Code, look at section
6744 \begin_inset space ~
6748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6750 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6763 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6770 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6771 For capital Roman numerals replace
6783 in the command above.
6784 For Arabic numerals use
6792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6799 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 You can only number 26
6825 \begin_inset space ~
6828 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6838 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6841 \begin_layout Standard
6842 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6845 \begin_layout Enumerate
6846 \begin_inset Argument 1
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6902 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_layout Enumerate
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Enumerate
6936 \begin_inset Argument 1
6939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Standard
6966 For this list these commands were used:
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6996 \begin_inset Newline newline
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7013 makes the label emphasized and
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7031 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7032 lists until you change the definition.
7040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7042 \begin_inset Index idx
7045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7046 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7058 \begin_layout Enumerate
7059 \begin_inset Argument 1
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7081 \begin_inset Note Note
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7085 goes back to default numbering
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7101 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7106 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7111 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7112 to indicate that it is a resumed
7113 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7114 , but in the output.
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7126 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7138 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7139 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7140 of a normal enumeration.
7141 There, insert the command
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7150 \begin_layout Standard
7155 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7159 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7168 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7171 \begin_layout Enumerate
7172 \begin_inset Argument 1
7175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7191 This enumeration starts at 4
7194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7196 \begin_inset Index idx
7199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7209 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7211 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7214 \begin_layout Itemize
7218 \begin_layout Itemize
7219 with standard spacing
7222 \begin_layout Standard
7223 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7225 Add there the command
7229 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7232 \begin_layout Itemize
7233 \begin_inset Argument 1
7236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7255 \begin_layout Itemize
7259 \begin_layout Itemize
7263 \begin_layout Standard
7264 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7271 \begin_inset Index idx
7274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7282 For more information see its documentation,
7283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7294 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7296 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7297 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7301 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7305 \begin_inset Argument 1
7308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7329 \begin_layout Enumerate
7330 with negative indentation
7333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7334 Further Customization
7335 \begin_inset Index idx
7338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7339 Lists ! Customization
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 You can also change the style of description lists.
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 changes the description label font, the command
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7369 sets the list style.
7372 \begin_layout Standard
7373 An example where the command
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 itshape, style=nextline
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7388 \begin_layout Description
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7394 \begin_inset Argument 1
7397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7403 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7405 itshape, style=nextline
7415 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7416 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7420 \begin_layout Description
7422 \begin_inset space ~
7425 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7426 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7427 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7431 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7448 For more information see its documentation
7449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7459 \begin_layout Subsection
7461 \begin_inset Index idx
7464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7475 \begin_inset space ~
7478 Address: An Overview
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7482 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7483 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7497 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7498 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7499 gags on the document.
7500 In contrast, you can use the
7507 \begin_inset space ~
7512 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7513 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7518 Of course, you're not limited to using
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7534 \begin_inset space ~
7539 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7540 some European academic papers.
7543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7547 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7559 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7560 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7569 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7570 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7571 Here's an example of each:
7574 \begin_layout Right Address
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 \begin_inset Newline newline
7584 \begin_inset Newline newline
7587 When is it? What is today?
7590 \begin_layout Standard
7594 \begin_inset space ~
7600 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7602 the largest block of text on a single line.
7603 Here's an example of the
7610 \begin_layout Address
7612 \begin_inset Newline newline
7615 Where do I send this
7616 \begin_inset Newline newline
7619 Your post office and country
7622 \begin_layout Standard
7623 As you can see, both
7630 \begin_inset space ~
7635 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7640 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7641 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7647 This makes sense, since
7655 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7656 Thus, you have to use
7663 arg "newline-insert newline"
7668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7671 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7680 ) to start a new line in an
7687 \begin_inset space ~
7695 \begin_layout Subsection
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7700 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7701 or list of references.
7703 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7708 \begin_inset Index idx
7711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7726 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7727 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7728 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7742 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7743 The book document classes ignores the
7747 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7751 in a letter document class.
7754 \begin_layout Standard
7759 environment does several things for you.
7760 First, it puts the centered label
7761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7769 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7771 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7772 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7773 the subsequent text.
7774 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7776 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7780 \begin_layout Standard
7781 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7785 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7786 The new paragraph will still be in the
7791 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7792 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7795 \begin_layout Standard
7796 \begin_inset Float figure
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Graphics
7806 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7819 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 We would love to demonstrate the
7845 environment, but since this document is in the
7846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7853 class, we can't do this.
7854 We inserted it therefore as figure
7855 \begin_inset space ~
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7861 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7866 If you have never heard of an
7867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7874 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7879 \begin_inset Index idx
7882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7891 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7898 \begin_layout Standard
7903 environment is used to list references.
7904 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7905 only use it at the end of the document.
7917 \begin_layout Standard
7918 When you first open a
7922 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7923 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7939 depending on the document class.
7940 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7941 Each paragraph of the
7945 environment is a bibliography entry.
7950 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7951 Each new paragraph is still in the
7958 \begin_layout Standard
7959 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7960 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7962 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7964 handling, have a look at section
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7971 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7978 \begin_layout Subsection
7979 Special Environments
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7984 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7985 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7993 \begin_inset Index idx
7996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8006 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8019 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8021 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8026 key as a fixed whitespace.
8030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8043 \begin_inset space ~
8048 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8066 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8069 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8072 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8090 So, when you finish using the
8095 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8096 Also, you can nest the
8101 environment inside of others.
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8105 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8108 \begin_layout Itemize
8112 arg "newline-insert newline"
8115 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8120 \begin_inset space \space{}
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
8140 arg "newline-insert newline"
8150 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8158 You must put at least one
8162 in any line you want blank.
8163 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8167 \begin_layout Itemize
8168 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8172 since that will insert
8177 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8180 arg "self-insert \""
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 printf("Hello World!
8212 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8216 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 This is just the standard
8222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8233 \begin_layout Standard
8239 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8241 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8242 as if you used a typewriter.
8243 \begin_inset Index idx
8246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8247 Paragraph environments|)
8252 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8255 Program Code Listings
8260 \begin_inset space ~
8268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8272 \begin_inset Index idx
8275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8284 \begin_layout Standard
8289 environment is similar to the
8294 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8295 computer console text.
8300 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8314 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8315 you can have empty lines.
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8329 have a certain language and a text style
8332 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8334 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8335 and \SpecialChar TeX
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8340 Because of these properties
8344 works like a typewriter.
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 The following 2 lines are empty:
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8362 \begin_layout Verbatim
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim
8367 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8377 environment is identical to
8381 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8382 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8389 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8393 \begin_layout Section
8394 Nesting Environments
8395 \begin_inset Index idx
8398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8399 Nesting ! Environments
8405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8414 \begin_layout Subsection
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8420 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8422 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8424 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8426 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8456 \begin_layout Enumerate
8460 \begin_layout Standard
8461 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8462 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8464 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset space ~
8478 \begin_inset space ~
8482 \begin_inset space ~
8487 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8489 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8492 arg "depth-increment"
8498 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 arg "depth-increment"
8518 arg "depth-decrement"
8522 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8523 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8528 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8529 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8530 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8531 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8532 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8535 \begin_layout Standard
8536 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8538 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8540 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8543 \begin_layout Subsection
8544 What You Can and Can't Nest
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8549 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8552 \begin_layout Standard
8553 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8554 than a simple yes or no.
8555 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 Completely unnestable
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8568 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8572 \begin_layout Standard
8573 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8574 environments have them:
8577 \begin_layout Description
8578 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8579 Can't nest into them.
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Description
8616 \begin_inset space ~
8619 Nestable You can nest them.
8620 You can nest other things into them.
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8686 \begin_layout Description
8687 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8688 You can't nest anything into them.
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8780 \begin_layout Itemize
8787 \begin_layout Standard
8788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8806 \begin_inset space ~
8809 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8810 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8811 nested section headings violate this.
8819 \begin_layout Subsection
8820 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8821 \begin_inset Index idx
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8833 \begin_layout Standard
8834 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8835 affected by nesting anyhow.
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Standard
8853 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8861 Figures and tables in
8865 are not affected by this.
8870 Have a look at section
8871 \begin_inset space ~
8875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8877 reference "sec:Floats"
8881 for more information about
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8890 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8891 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8904 of its own, it behaves just like a
8905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8912 paragraph environment.
8913 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8917 \begin_layout Standard
8918 Here's an example with a table:
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8926 \begin_layout Enumerate
8927 This is (a) and it's nested.
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8938 \begin_layout Standard
8940 \begin_inset Tabular
8941 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8942 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9038 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9042 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 \begin_layout Standard
9047 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9055 \begin_layout Enumerate
9056 This is (a) and it's nested.
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9061 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9067 \begin_layout Standard
9069 \begin_inset Tabular
9070 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9071 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9174 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9187 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 This is (a) and it's nested.
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9206 \begin_layout Standard
9208 \begin_inset Tabular
9209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9324 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9325 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9329 \begin_layout Subsection
9330 Usage and General Features
9333 \begin_layout Standard
9334 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9335 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9344 is the innermost possible depth.
9345 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 level #1 – outermost
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Enumerate
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Itemize
9382 \begin_layout Standard
9383 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9384 both of them in the example.
9385 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9395 For example, if we tried to nest another
9400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9407 , we would get errors.
9410 \begin_layout Subsection
9412 \begin_inset Index idx
9415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9424 \begin_layout Standard
9425 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9426 We have several examples of nested environments.
9427 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9432 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9435 \begin_layout Labeling
9436 \labelwidthstring MMM
9437 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9446 \begin_layout Labeling
9447 \labelwidthstring MMM
9448 #2-a This is level #2.
9449 We created it by using
9452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9458 arg "depth-increment"
9465 \begin_layout Labeling
9466 \labelwidthstring MMM
9467 #3-a This is level #3.
9468 This time, we just enter
9475 arg "depth-increment"
9479 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9483 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9489 arg "depth-increment"
9496 \begin_layout Standard
9501 environment, nested inside of
9502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9510 So, it's at level #4.
9511 We did this by entering
9514 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9520 arg "depth-increment"
9523 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9528 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9544 \begin_layout Standard
9549 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9552 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 \begin_layout Labeling
9559 \labelwidthstring MMM
9560 #4-a This is level #4.
9564 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9567 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9572 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9576 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9581 keep nesting things inside
9582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9595 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9602 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9603 and this is level #6.
9604 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9608 \begin_layout Labeling
9609 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 #5-b Back to level #5.
9614 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9620 arg "depth-decrement"
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9638 arg "depth-decrement"
9641 , we're back at level #4.
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9647 #3-b Back to level #3.
9648 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9652 \begin_layout Labeling
9653 \labelwidthstring MMM
9654 #2-b Back to level #2.
9659 \begin_layout Labeling
9660 \labelwidthstring MMM
9661 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9662 After this sentence, we will enter
9666 and change the paragraph environment back to
9673 \begin_layout Standard
9674 We could have also used the
9690 environment in place of the
9695 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9699 Example 2: Inheritance
9702 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9703 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9706 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9715 arg "depth-increment"
9719 \begin_inset Newline newline
9722 which, we will change to the
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9735 environment, at level #2.
9738 \begin_layout Enumerate
9739 Notice how the nested
9743 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9747 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9751 \begin_layout Standard
9752 We ended this example by entering
9757 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9761 and reset the nesting depth by using
9764 arg "depth-decrement"
9770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9771 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9780 \begin_inset Argument 1
9783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9784 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9793 This is level #1, in an
9797 paragraph environment.
9798 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9813 arg "depth-increment"
9817 Now, what happens if we nest an
9821 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9822 label be? An asterisk?
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9836 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9837 So, its label is a bullet.
9838 (We got here by using
9841 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9847 arg "depth-increment"
9850 , then changing the environment to
9858 \begin_layout Itemize
9859 Here's level #4, produced using
9862 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9868 arg "depth-increment"
9872 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9885 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9889 , because we are in the
9897 environment (that is, it is an
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9918 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9923 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9926 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 arg "depth-decrement"
9939 to decrease the depth after the next
9942 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9959 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9963 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9973 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9978 reset the counter for the label.
9982 \begin_layout Enumerate
9986 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9992 arg "depth-decrement"
9995 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9996 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9997 into the twofold-nested
10005 \begin_layout Enumerate
10006 The same thing happens if we do another
10009 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10015 arg "depth-decrement"
10018 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10021 \begin_layout Standard
10022 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10027 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10038 The number of other
10042 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10049 The same rule applies for the
10053 environment, as well.
10056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10057 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10060 \begin_layout Enumerate
10061 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10062 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10063 the same detail with how we did it.
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10080 arg "depth-increment"
10087 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10088 the example in parentheses someplace.
10089 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10090 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10091 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10100 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10104 \begin_layout Verse
10105 Now we will add verse.
10106 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 It will get much worse.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "depth-increment"
10130 \begin_layout Verse
10131 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10132 \begin_inset Newline newline
10135 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10136 \begin_inset Newline newline
10142 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10150 \begin_layout Verse
10151 Here comes a table:
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10164 \begin_inset Tabular
10165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10253 \begin_layout Verse
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-increment"
10273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10287 arg "depth-decrement"
10294 \begin_layout Enumerate
10299 : level #1) This is another item.
10300 Note that selecting a
10304 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10305 3 times to put the table inside the
10313 \begin_layout Quotation
10314 We're now ending the
10318 list and changing to
10323 We're still at level #1.
10324 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10325 The next set of paragraphs is a
10326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10333 We will nest both the
10340 \begin_inset space ~
10345 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10349 for the letter body.
10353 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10356 to preserve the depth.
10357 Remember that you need to use
10360 arg "newline-insert newline"
10363 to create multiple lines inside the
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10380 \begin_layout Right Address
10382 \begin_inset Newline newline
10385 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10386 \begin_inset Newline newline
10392 \begin_layout Address
10394 \begin_inset space ~
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10405 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10406 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10407 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10408 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10409 as soon as possible.
10410 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10415 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10416 with your order, along with payment.
10419 \begin_layout Quotation
10420 We thank you again for your patience.
10423 \begin_layout Address
10425 \begin_inset Newline newline
10432 \begin_layout Quotation
10433 That ends that example!
10436 \begin_layout Standard
10437 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10438 gives you a lot of power with just
10440 We could have easily nested an
10461 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10464 \begin_layout Subsection
10466 \begin_inset Index idx
10469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10470 Nesting ! Separation
10476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10478 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10485 \begin_layout Standard
10486 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10488 For example you need two different enumerations:
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 \begin_inset Separator plain
10512 \begin_layout Itemize
10518 \begin_layout Standard
10519 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 \begin_layout Enumerate
10533 \begin_layout Enumerate
10537 \begin_layout Standard
10538 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10539 list item and use the menu
10541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10542 Separated <Name> Above
10546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10547 Separated <Name> Below
10550 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10551 ) and before or behind it the
10553 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10556 \begin_layout Standard
10557 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10558 (red arrow in LyX).
10559 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10560 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10563 \begin_layout Standard
10564 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10567 arg "paragraph-break"
10574 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10577 \begin_layout Section
10578 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10593 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10595 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10596 be broken at the end of a line.
10597 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10601 \begin_layout Subsection
10603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10605 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10610 \begin_inset Index idx
10613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10622 \begin_layout Standard
10623 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10624 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10625 ) not to break the line at
10627 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10630 \begin_layout Quote
10631 Further documentation is given in section
10632 \begin_inset Newline newline
10636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10638 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10647 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10662 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10671 A protected space is set with
10673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10674 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10676 \begin_inset space ~
10684 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10690 \begin_layout Subsection
10692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10694 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10699 \begin_inset Index idx
10702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10703 Spacing ! Horizontal
10711 \begin_layout Standard
10712 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10715 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10719 The length units are listed in Appendix
10720 \begin_inset space ~
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10726 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10737 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10742 \begin_inset Index idx
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10746 Spaces ! Inter-word
10754 \begin_layout Standard
10755 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10756 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10757 at the ends of sentences.
10758 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10759 automatically takes care about this.
10760 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10761 followed by a period; see section
10762 \begin_inset space ~
10766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10768 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10773 To insert a normal space, select
10775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10776 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10786 arg "space-insert normal"
10792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10796 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10801 \begin_inset Index idx
10804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10813 \begin_layout Standard
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10831 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10832 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10833 inside abbreviations:
10836 \begin_layout Quote
10838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10842 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10845 \begin_layout Standard
10846 or between values and units.
10847 Compare for example this:
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10856 \begin_inset Newline newline
10859 10 kg (normal space
10862 \begin_layout Standard
10863 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10866 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10868 \begin_inset space ~
10876 arg "space-insert thin"
10882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10886 \begin_layout Standard
10887 You can also insert the following space types:
10890 \begin_layout Description
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10896 \begin_inset space ~
10899 space A line with a
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10904 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10908 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10911 negative thin space between the arrows.
10914 \begin_layout Description
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10920 \begin_inset space ~
10923 space A line with a
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10928 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10932 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10935 negative medium space between the arrows.
10938 \begin_layout Description
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset space ~
10947 space A line with a
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10952 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10956 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10959 negative thick space between the arrows.
10962 \begin_layout Description
10964 \begin_inset space ~
10968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10976 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10980 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 em) space between the arrows.
10994 \begin_layout Description
10996 \begin_inset space ~
11000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11008 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11016 \begin_inset space ~
11020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11023 em) space between the arrows.
11026 \begin_layout Description
11028 \begin_inset space ~
11032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11040 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11044 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11048 \begin_inset space ~
11052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11055 em) space between the arrows.
11058 \begin_layout Description
11060 \begin_inset space ~
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11068 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11073 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11080 cm space between the arrows.
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11091 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11095 lists the different space sizes.
11098 \begin_layout Standard
11099 \begin_inset Float table
11106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11107 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11112 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11116 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11126 \begin_inset Tabular
11127 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11128 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11246 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11405 \begin_inset Index idx
11408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11419 feature for adding extra space
11420 in a uniform fashion.
11421 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11422 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11423 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11424 equally between themselves.
11427 \begin_layout Standard
11428 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11431 \begin_layout Quote
11433 This is on the left side
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 This is on the right
11440 \begin_layout Quote
11443 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_layout Quote
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11470 \begin_layout Standard
11471 That was an example in the
11477 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11481 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11485 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11488 is one in a standard paragraph.
11489 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11493 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11496 \begin_layout Standard
11497 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11505 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11510 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11522 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11534 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11538 \begin_inset space ~
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11550 \begin_inset space ~
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11562 \begin_inset space ~
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11574 \begin_inset space ~
11580 \begin_layout Standard
11581 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11589 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11593 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11595 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11596 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11600 option in the space dialog.
11608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11612 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11617 \begin_inset Index idx
11620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11630 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11631 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11634 \begin_layout Standard
11635 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11638 What is correct English?:
11639 \begin_inset Newline newline
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset space ~
11650 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11651 \begin_inset Newline newline
11655 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11666 \begin_inset Newline newline
11670 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11681 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11687 \begin_layout Standard
11689 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11709 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11713 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11719 \begin_inset space ~
11723 \begin_inset space ~
11727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11730 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11739 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11740 That is why it is named
11741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11749 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11750 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11754 \begin_layout Subsection
11756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11758 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11763 \begin_inset Index idx
11766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 There you find the following sizes:
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11803 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11804 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11809 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11811 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11812 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11814 \begin_inset space ~
11820 \begin_inset Index idx
11823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 Document ! Settings
11829 for the paragraph separation.
11830 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11847 \begin_inset Index idx
11850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11856 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11857 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11862 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11863 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11872 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 s are described in section
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11897 If there are several
11901 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11902 You can therefore use
11906 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11909 \begin_layout Standard
11914 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11915 \begin_inset space ~
11919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11921 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11928 \begin_layout Standard
11929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11939 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11940 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11952 \begin_layout Subsection
11953 Paragraph Alignment
11954 \begin_inset Index idx
11957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11958 Paragraph ! Alignment
11966 \begin_layout Standard
11967 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11969 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11972 dialog (toolbar button
11975 arg "layout-paragraph"
11979 There are five possibilities:
11982 \begin_layout Itemize
11990 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11996 \begin_layout Itemize
12004 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12010 \begin_layout Itemize
12018 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12024 \begin_layout Itemize
12032 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12038 \begin_layout Itemize
12046 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12053 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12054 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12055 the left and right margins.
12056 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 This paragraph is right aligned,
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12066 this one is centered,
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12071 this one is left aligned.
12074 \begin_layout Subsection
12076 \begin_inset Index idx
12079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12080 Page breaks ! Forced
12086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12088 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12098 force a page break where you want one.
12099 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 is good at page breaking.
12101 Only if you use a lot of
12105 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12106 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12111 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12115 have to change the page breaking.
12118 \begin_layout Standard
12119 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12121 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12132 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12135 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12137 \begin_inset space ~
12142 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12144 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12145 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12148 \begin_layout Standard
12149 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12150 at the top of a page.
12151 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12153 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12154 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12155 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12159 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12163 to learn more about
12170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12174 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12179 \begin_inset Index idx
12182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12183 Page breaks ! Clear
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12193 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12194 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12195 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12196 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12200 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12211 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12214 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12216 \begin_inset space ~
12220 \begin_inset space ~
12225 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12226 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12229 \begin_layout Subsection
12231 \begin_inset Index idx
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12243 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12250 \begin_layout Standard
12251 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12253 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12270 arg "newline-insert newline"
12274 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12277 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12291 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12294 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12296 This is useful to avoid
12297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12304 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12307 \begin_layout Standard
12308 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12309 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12311 very good at line breaking.
12312 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12313 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Quote"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Verse"
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12334 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12341 \begin_layout Subsection
12343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12345 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12350 \begin_inset Index idx
12353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12362 \begin_layout Standard
12364 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12375 \begin_layout Standard
12379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12380 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12382 \begin_inset space ~
12387 you can insert horizontal lines.
12388 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12389 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12390 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12395 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12406 \begin_layout Section
12407 Characters and Symbols
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12412 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12413 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12421 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12425 for information on how this is done.
12428 \begin_layout Standard
12429 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12434 dialog via the menu
12436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12452 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12453 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12455 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12463 \begin_layout Section
12464 Fonts and Text Styles
12465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12467 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12474 \begin_layout Subsection
12476 \begin_inset Index idx
12479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12488 \begin_layout Standard
12489 There are two types of fonts:
12492 \begin_layout Description
12494 \begin_inset space ~
12498 \begin_inset Index idx
12501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12507 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12512 characters) in the font.
12513 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12514 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12515 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12516 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12517 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12518 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12519 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12523 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12524 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12525 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12526 sizes than at small ones.
12527 \begin_inset Newline newline
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_layout Description
12551 \begin_inset space ~
12555 \begin_inset Index idx
12558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12564 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12565 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12566 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12567 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12568 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12569 image manipulation program.
12570 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12571 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12572 \begin_inset space ~
12575 pixels high up to 34
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12579 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12580 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12581 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12583 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12584 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12585 \begin_inset Newline newline
12588 Bitmap fonts are named
12591 \begin_inset space ~
12596 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12601 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12602 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12603 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12604 use scalable fonts.
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12608 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12612 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12619 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12620 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12621 font to emphasize text, you use an
12622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12630 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12632 In \SpecialChar LyX
12633 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12637 \begin_layout Subsection
12640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12642 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 used its own fonts.
12652 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12653 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12657 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12658 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12659 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12660 to a word processor.
12661 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12662 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12663 files are very portable across
12664 different machines.
12665 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 has increased a lot
12667 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12670 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12672 \begin_inset space ~
12676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12678 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12683 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12684 code in the document
12685 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12688 \begin_layout Standard
12689 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12690 engines that are also able directly
12691 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12693 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12695 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12697 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12698 that is installed on your system.
12699 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12702 \begin_layout Standard
12703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12711 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12712 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12720 \begin_layout Subsection
12721 Document Font and Font size
12722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12724 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 \begin_inset Index idx
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 You can set the document fonts in the
12754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12758 \begin_inset Index idx
12761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12762 Document ! Settings
12772 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12773 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12785 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12787 \begin_inset space ~
12790 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12793 \begin_layout Standard
12798 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12799 This requires that you use
12811 as the output format, i.
12812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12816 \begin_inset space \space{}
12819 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12820 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12821 installed (see section
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12828 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12833 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12835 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12836 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12838 \begin_inset space ~
12841 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12842 cannot determine the family.
12843 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12844 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12847 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12850 \begin_layout Standard
12851 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12852 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12857 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12863 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12865 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12867 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12870 font encoding, this is
12871 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12872 , depending on the document language,
12875 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12876 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12884 \begin_inset space ~
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12900 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12901 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12909 \begin_inset space ~
12915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12923 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12944 European Computer Modern
12947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12955 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12958 \begin_layout Standard
12963 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12964 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12969 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12977 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12983 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12984 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12987 \begin_layout Itemize
12991 \begin_inset space ~
12996 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13014 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13015 community in order to replace
13019 as the default font.
13020 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13021 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 One difference is improved kerning.
13046 \begin_layout Itemize
13047 If you do not like the look of
13055 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13076 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13077 \begin_inset space ~
13080 serif and typewriter fonts,
13084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13085 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13106 \begin_inset space \space{}
13114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13118 \begin_inset space \space{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13142 but you can also select your own.
13143 \begin_inset Newline newline
13146 The differences between roman,
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13158 fonts are explained in section
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13165 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13170 \begin_inset Newline newline
13176 \begin_inset space ~
13181 was originally designed for newspapers.
13182 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13183 into the small newspaper columns.
13187 \begin_inset space ~
13192 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13196 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13209 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13214 depends on the class you are using.
13215 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13218 \begin_layout Standard
13219 Note that the font size is the
13224 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13225 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13226 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13227 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13236 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13243 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13250 \begin_layout Standard
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13259 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13264 serif or typewriter.
13269 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13279 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13287 LaTeX font encoding
13289 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13290 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13296 \begin_inset Index idx
13299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13307 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13315 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13322 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13323 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13324 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13328 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13339 Use Old Style Figures
13343 Use True Small Caps
13346 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13349 Use Old Style Figures
13351 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13353 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13361 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13365 Use True Small Caps
13367 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13368 of scaled capitals.
13369 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13370 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13373 \begin_layout Standard
13378 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13379 a font to display the script characters.
13383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13384 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13390 \begin_inset Index idx
13393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13400 So this has no effect for the document language
13416 \begin_layout Standard
13419 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13421 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13422 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13428 \begin_inset Index idx
13431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13433 packages ! microtype
13442 \begin_layout Standard
13445 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13447 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13452 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13453 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13459 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13460 \begin_inset space ~
13464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13466 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13476 \begin_layout Standard
13477 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13489 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13494 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13495 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13497 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13499 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13502 dialog, see section
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13509 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13521 \begin_layout Subsection
13525 \begin_layout Standard
13526 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13527 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13529 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13530 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13531 choose a math font in the dialog
13533 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13537 \begin_inset Index idx
13540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13541 Document ! Settings
13547 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13548 automatically selects a math font.
13549 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13550 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13559 \begin_inset space ~
13565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13570 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13571 document font is available.
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13575 Note that the math font will not be used for
13579 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13585 or by the insertion of the command
13592 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13593 \begin_inset space ~
13597 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13598 while the math characters do not.
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13603 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13606 \begin_inset space ~
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13619 in the document font settings.
13622 \begin_layout Standard
13623 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13624 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13625 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13626 font (in most cases
13627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13642 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13643 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13651 \begin_inset space ~
13657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13663 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13667 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13675 name "subsec:charstyles"
13682 \begin_inset Index idx
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13692 \begin_inset Index idx
13695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13705 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13706 automatically changes the
13707 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13710 style for certain paragraph environments.
13712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13713 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13715 This is where we meet the concept of
13721 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13727 \begin_layout Standard
13729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13734 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13758 e., available with all document classes.
13759 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13763 for specific purposes.
13764 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13767 \begin_layout Standard
13769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13770 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13780 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13784 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13797 — you customized the
13802 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13803 among them, encourage the use of
13815 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13816 \begin_inset space ~
13820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13822 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13827 Rather than fiddling with
13831 , they encourage the use of
13835 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13840 \begin_inset Quotes els
13844 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13847 ), not their form (
13848 \begin_inset Quotes els
13852 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13856 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13857 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13858 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13859 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13860 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13861 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13867 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13871 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13872 With a semantic markup (such as
13876 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13881 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13883 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13884 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13890 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13891 by \SpecialChar LyX
13897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13900 Builtin Text Styles
13901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13903 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13913 The two builtin text styles can be
13914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13922 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13923 both of these styles
13926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13945 style, do one of the following:
13948 \begin_layout Itemize
13949 click on the toolbar button
13958 \begin_layout Itemize
13959 use the key binding
13966 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13970 \begin_layout Itemize
13972 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13980 arg "dialog-show character"
13986 arg "dialog-show character"
13989 ) as described in section
13990 \begin_inset space ~
13994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13996 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14005 \begin_layout Standard
14006 These commands are all toggles.
14011 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14014 \begin_layout Standard
14015 One typically uses the
14019 style for proper names.
14021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14028 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14038 \begin_layout Standard
14040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14045 is producing text in
14049 , but the definition can be changed.
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14056 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14066 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14073 \begin_layout Itemize
14074 clicking on the toolbar button
14083 \begin_layout Itemize
14084 using the keybindings
14091 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14095 \begin_layout Itemize
14097 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14105 arg "dialog-show character"
14111 arg "dialog-show character"
14114 ) as described in section
14115 \begin_inset space ~
14119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14121 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14130 \begin_layout Standard
14135 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14137 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14139 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14142 packages use a different font
14143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14144 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14150 \begin_layout Standard
14151 We've been using the
14155 style all over the place in this document.
14156 Here's one more example:
14159 \begin_layout Quotation
14163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14171 \begin_layout Standard
14172 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14173 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14174 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14175 the common tendency to overuse
14176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14189 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14190 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14191 only as font changes and integrated in the
14199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14202 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14209 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14211 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14215 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14220 \begin_inset space ~
14223 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14231 arg "dialog-show character"
14237 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14239 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14245 arg "dialog-show character"
14249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14255 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14259 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14266 \begin_layout Standard
14268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14269 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14271 \begin_inset space ~
14275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14277 reference "subsec:Modules"
14284 ), or local layout settings (see section
14285 \begin_inset space ~
14289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14291 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14296 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14300 markup for specific functions.
14301 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14306 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14316 \begin_inset Quotes els
14320 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14326 \begin_layout Standard
14328 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14329 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14340 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14345 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14346 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14347 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14352 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14353 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14358 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14366 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14367 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14368 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14369 \begin_inset Flex Code
14372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14383 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14397 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14402 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14411 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14412 on screen their formal appearance.
14417 \begin_layout Subsection
14419 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14421 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14431 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14433 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14439 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14447 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14452 \begin_inset Index idx
14455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14464 \begin_layout Standard
14465 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14469 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14471 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14473 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14478 the properties of text passages
14479 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14483 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14484 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14485 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14486 from ordinary dialog.
14487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14491 \begin_layout Standard
14493 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14494 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14495 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14496 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14497 the properties of the respective text passages.
14502 comes in as a last resort.
14507 \begin_layout Standard
14508 Before we document how to
14509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14510 use custom character style
14511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14512 tweak the text properties
14514 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14517 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14521 \begin_inset Newline newline
14524 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14525 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14528 \begin_layout Standard
14530 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14531 use custom character styles
14532 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14533 tweak text properties
14536 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14541 \begin_inset space ~
14544 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14546 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14552 arg "dialog-show character"
14557 dialog or press the toolbar button
14560 arg "dialog-show character"
14565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14568 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14569 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14571 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14574 property that you can choose.
14575 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14578 \begin_inset space ~
14583 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14596 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14597 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14598 environments all at once.
14601 \begin_layout Standard
14603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14608 properties, and their options (in addition to
14611 \begin_inset space ~
14617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14621 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14629 \begin_layout Labeling
14630 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14644 The possible options are:
14648 \begin_layout Labeling
14649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14654 This is the Roman font family.
14655 Normally a serif font.
14656 It's also the default family.
14666 \begin_layout Labeling
14667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14671 \begin_inset space ~
14678 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14690 \begin_layout Labeling
14691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14698 This is the Typewriter font family.
14704 arg "font-typewriter"
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14714 \begin_layout Standard
14716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14717 The general differences of these families are:
14720 \begin_layout Itemize
14722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14727 fonts use characters with serifs.
14728 These are the small
14729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14736 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14737 The following example shows the difference:
14738 \begin_inset Newline newline
14742 \begin_inset Newline newline
14747 text without serifs
14750 \begin_inset Newline newline
14753 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14754 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14761 \begin_layout Itemize
14763 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14768 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14769 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14770 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14773 \begin_layout Itemize
14775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14788 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 \begin_inset Newline newline
14810 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14815 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14826 \begin_inset Note Note
14829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14832 For more on phantoms see section
14833 \begin_inset space ~
14837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14839 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14849 \begin_inset Newline newline
14858 \begin_layout Labeling
14859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14864 This corresponds to the print weight.
14869 \begin_layout Labeling
14870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14875 This is the Medium font series.
14876 It's also the default series.
14879 \begin_layout Labeling
14880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14887 This is the Bold font series.
14900 \begin_layout Labeling
14901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14906 As the name implies.
14911 \begin_layout Labeling
14912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14917 This is the Upright font shape.
14918 It's also the default shape.
14921 \begin_layout Labeling
14922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14932 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14942 s the Italic font shape
14948 \begin_layout Labeling
14949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14956 This is the Slanted font shape
14958 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14959 , this is different from italic).
14962 \begin_layout Labeling
14963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14967 \begin_inset space ~
14974 This is the Small caps font shape
14981 \begin_layout Labeling
14982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14987 Alters the text color.
14988 Note that not all DVI
14989 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14991 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14994 viewers are able to display colors.
14996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15002 \begin_inset space ~
15009 , which means that the document default color set in
15011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15012 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15018 \begin_inset space ~
15024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15030 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15110 \begin_inset Index idx
15113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15122 \begin_layout Labeling
15123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15128 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15129 the language of the document.
15130 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15131 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15132 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15135 in blue to indicate the change
15136 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15137 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15141 \begin_inset Newline newline
15144 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15146 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15147 When using the spell checking (see section
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15154 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15158 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15159 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15161 \begin_inset Newline newline
15164 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15166 Exclude from Spellchecking
15169 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15172 \begin_layout Labeling
15173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15178 Alters the size of the font.
15180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15189 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15190 document font size.
15191 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15192 the details, but a general description of what
15198 \begin_layout Labeling
15199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15220 arg "font-size tiny"
15226 \begin_layout Labeling
15227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15248 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15254 \begin_layout Labeling
15255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15276 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15282 \begin_layout Labeling
15283 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 arg "font-size small"
15310 \begin_layout Labeling
15311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15325 It's also the default size.
15329 arg "font-size normal"
15335 \begin_layout Labeling
15336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15357 arg "font-size large"
15363 \begin_layout Labeling
15364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15385 arg "font-size larger"
15391 \begin_layout Labeling
15392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15413 arg "font-size largest"
15419 \begin_layout Labeling
15420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15441 arg "font-size huge"
15447 \begin_layout Labeling
15448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15469 arg "font-size giant"
15475 \begin_layout Labeling
15476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15481 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15501 arg "font-size increase"
15507 \begin_layout Labeling
15508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15513 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15533 arg "font-size decrease"
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15545 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15546 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15548 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15549 — use those instead.
15550 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15556 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15566 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15567 change a few other things at the character level
15568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15569 have text passages being underlined
15573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15574 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15575 days, when you could not change fonts.
15576 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15577 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15578 because some people
15582 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15589 \begin_layout Labeling
15590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15592 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15599 This is text with emphasize on
15602 This might seem like the same as
15606 , but it is actually a bit different.
15612 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15614 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15619 \begin_layout Labeling
15620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15622 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15627 Don't use underlining.
15632 \begin_layout Labeling
15633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15649 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15658 arg "font-underline"
15664 \begin_inset Newline newline
15668 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15671 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15672 when you could not change fonts.
15673 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15674 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15675 because some people
15679 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15684 \begin_layout Labeling
15685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15689 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15691 \begin_inset space ~
15700 This is text with Double under
15701 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15712 arg "font-underunderline"
15716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15718 \begin_inset Newline newline
15721 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15722 about double underbar
15727 \begin_layout Labeling
15728 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15734 \begin_inset space ~
15743 This is text with Wavy under
15744 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15746 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15755 arg "font-underwave"
15759 \begin_inset Newline newline
15762 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15763 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15769 \begin_layout Labeling
15770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15777 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15783 \begin_layout Labeling
15784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15791 Don't use strikethrough.
15794 \begin_layout Labeling
15795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15799 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15815 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15816 Single strikethrough
15824 arg "font-strikeout"
15828 \begin_inset Newline newline
15831 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15832 changed in the meantime.
15835 \begin_layout Labeling
15836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15838 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15842 \begin_inset space ~
15846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15848 \begin_inset space ~
15852 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15860 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15868 \begin_inset Newline newline
15871 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15875 \begin_layout Standard
15877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15878 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15879 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15886 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15893 \begin_layout Itemize
15895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15902 This is text with emphasize on
15907 \begin_layout Itemize
15911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15918 This is text with Noun on.
15920 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15927 , this is a logical attribute.
15928 Normally it's equivalent to
15931 \begin_inset space ~
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15942 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15943 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15950 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15951 chosen a new character style
15952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15953 applied a text property
15956 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15964 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15966 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15972 arg "dialog-show character"
15980 arg "dialog-show character"
15983 ) dialog, the settings are
15984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15988 You can activate the
15989 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15991 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15992 last applied properties
15994 by using the toolbar button
15997 arg "textstyle-apply"
16001 The button lets you apply
16002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16003 your custom character style
16004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16007 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16010 \begin_layout Standard
16011 To completely reset the
16012 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16014 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16015 text properties of a selection
16017 to the default, use
16025 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16026 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16027 you just set the shape to
16028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16046 \begin_inset space ~
16060 \begin_layout Standard
16062 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16063 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16071 \begin_inset space ~
16083 \begin_layout Itemize
16085 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16098 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16116 \begin_inset Newline newline
16120 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16134 \begin_inset Note Note
16137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16138 For more on phantoms see section
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16145 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16155 \begin_inset Newline newline
16161 \begin_layout Itemize
16163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16168 fonts use characters with serifs.
16169 These are the small
16170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16177 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16178 The following example shows the difference:
16179 \begin_inset Newline newline
16183 \begin_inset Newline newline
16188 text without serifs
16191 \begin_inset Newline newline
16194 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16195 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16202 \begin_layout Itemize
16204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16209 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16210 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16211 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16216 \begin_layout Standard
16218 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16226 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16227 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16230 \begin_inset space ~
16235 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16236 the property to be removed.
16237 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16238 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16239 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16257 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16258 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16266 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16270 \begin_inset space ~
16275 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 If you, for example, set
16287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16305 \begin_inset space ~
16310 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16324 \begin_layout Standard
16326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16329 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16330 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16333 \begin_layout Section
16334 Printing and Previewing
16337 \begin_layout Subsection
16341 \begin_layout Standard
16342 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16343 using \SpecialChar LyX
16344 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16345 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16346 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16347 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16349 Additional Features
16354 \begin_layout Standard
16356 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16359 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16360 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16361 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16364 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16365 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16366 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16367 to turn your writing into printable output.
16368 This happens in two stages:
16371 \begin_layout Enumerate
16372 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16373 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16375 a file with the extension,
16376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16390 \begin_layout Enumerate
16391 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16392 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16393 to use the commands in the
16397 file to produce printable output.
16400 \begin_layout Subsection
16401 Output file formats
16402 \begin_inset Index idx
16405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16414 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16422 Simple text (ASCII)
16423 \begin_inset Index idx
16426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16427 File formats ! ASCII
16435 \begin_layout Standard
16436 This file type has the extension
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16449 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16453 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16463 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16464 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16466 \begin_inset space ~
16472 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16473 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16474 bibliography (section
16475 \begin_inset space ~
16479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16481 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16486 If your document includes such material, use
16488 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16489 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16491 \begin_inset space ~
16495 \begin_inset space ~
16499 \begin_inset space ~
16507 \begin_inset space ~
16511 \begin_inset space ~
16517 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16518 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16524 \begin_inset Index idx
16527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16528 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16537 \begin_layout Standard
16538 This file type has the extension
16539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16550 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16554 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16555 -Errors or to process it manually
16556 with console commands.
16557 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16558 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16559 's temporary directory whenever you
16560 view or export your document.
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16565 -file using the menu
16567 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16568 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16572 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16573 export variants are explained in section
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16580 reference "subsec:Export"
16587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16589 \begin_inset Index idx
16592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16601 \begin_layout Standard
16602 This file type has the extension
16603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16623 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16624 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16625 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16629 \begin_layout Standard
16630 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16631 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16632 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16633 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16634 when you view the DVI.
16635 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16638 \begin_layout Standard
16639 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16641 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16642 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16647 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16648 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16650 \begin_inset space ~
16656 The latter option uses the program
16658 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16664 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16667 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16668 font access (see section
16669 \begin_inset space ~
16673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16675 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16680 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16681 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16688 \begin_inset Index idx
16691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16692 File formats ! PostScript
16700 \begin_layout Standard
16701 This file type has the extension
16702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16714 PostScript was developed by the company
16718 as a printer language.
16719 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16721 PostScript can be seen as a
16722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16725 programming language
16726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16729 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16734 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16741 \begin_inset Index idx
16744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16746 packages ! pstricks
16756 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16759 \begin_layout Standard
16760 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16764 Encapsulated PostScript
16765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16768 (EPS, file extension
16769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16781 As \SpecialChar LyX
16782 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16783 convert them in the background to EPS.
16784 If, for example, you have 50
16785 \begin_inset space ~
16788 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16790 \begin_inset space ~
16793 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16794 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16796 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16797 EPS to avoid this problem.
16800 \begin_layout Standard
16801 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16803 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16804 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16812 \begin_inset Index idx
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16822 \begin_inset Index idx
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16834 \begin_layout Standard
16835 This file type has the extension
16836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16852 Portable Document Format
16853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16860 was derived from PostScript.
16861 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16870 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16871 looks exactly the same.
16874 \begin_layout Standard
16875 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16879 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16883 (JPG, file extension
16884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 Portable Network Graphics
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 (PNG, file extension
16916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16928 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16929 converts them in the
16930 background to one of these formats.
16931 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16932 will slow down your workflow.
16933 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16936 \begin_layout Standard
16937 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16939 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16945 \begin_layout Description
16947 \begin_inset space ~
16950 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16954 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16957 \begin_layout Description
16959 \begin_inset space ~
16966 ) This uses the program
16968 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16971 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16974 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16977 is a new engine, derived from
16981 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16982 access (see section
16983 \begin_inset space ~
16987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16989 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16994 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16995 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17000 \begin_layout Description
17002 \begin_inset space ~
17009 ) This uses the program
17014 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17020 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17021 font access (see section
17022 \begin_inset space ~
17026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17028 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17033 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17034 vertically written Japanese.
17037 \begin_layout Description
17039 \begin_inset space ~
17042 (cropped) This is the same as
17045 \begin_inset space ~
17050 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17051 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17052 to generate good-looking
17053 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17056 \begin_layout Description
17058 \begin_inset space ~
17061 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17065 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17069 \begin_layout Description
17071 \begin_inset space ~
17074 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17078 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17079 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17083 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17084 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17087 \begin_layout Standard
17091 \begin_inset space ~
17100 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17101 works without problems.
17102 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17103 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17107 \begin_inset space ~
17115 \begin_inset space ~
17120 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17130 \begin_inset Index idx
17133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17134 FileFormats ! XHTML
17140 \begin_inset Index idx
17143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17152 \begin_layout Standard
17153 This file type has the extension
17154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17166 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17167 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17168 When \SpecialChar LyX
17169 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17170 suitable for the purpose.
17171 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17174 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17177 between different formats, which are described in section
17179 Math Output in XHTML
17184 \begin_inset space ~
17192 \begin_layout Standard
17193 XHTML output remains
17194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17201 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17202 features are supported yet.
17206 and the World Wide Web
17210 Additional Features
17212 manual, for more information.
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17216 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17218 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17219 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17225 \begin_layout Subsection
17227 \begin_inset Index idx
17230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17239 \begin_layout Standard
17240 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17241 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17250 or use the toolbar button
17257 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17258 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17259 \begin_inset space ~
17263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17265 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17269 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17271 \begin_inset space ~
17275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17277 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17282 Further output formats can be selected via
17284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17285 View (Other Formats)
17287 or the toolbar button
17296 \begin_layout Standard
17297 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17298 viewer window using the menu
17300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17306 Update (Other Formats)
17311 \begin_layout Standard
17312 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17315 To have a real output, export your document.
17318 \begin_layout Section
17319 A few Words about Typography
17320 \begin_inset Index idx
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17332 \begin_layout Subsection
17333 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17334 \begin_inset Index idx
17337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17344 \begin_inset Index idx
17347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 In \SpecialChar LyX
17359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17370 symbol comes in four variants: the
17387 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17393 \begin_layout Standard
17394 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17404 height_special "totalheight"
17409 backgroundcolor "none"
17412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 \begin_inset Tabular
17414 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17415 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17416 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17417 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17418 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17419 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17448 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17449 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17488 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17511 system key combination
17515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17516 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17528 and the em dash with
17531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17544 is the Mac label for the right
17555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17568 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17569 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17591 system key combination or
17592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17619 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17658 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17664 \begin_layout Standard
17665 Dashes can also be inserted with
17667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17669 \begin_inset space ~
17672 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17680 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17681 and 2014 for the en dash).
17684 \begin_layout Standard
17685 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17686 mode and has a length of its own.
17687 Here are some examples:
17690 \begin_layout Enumerate
17691 line- and page-breaks
17692 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17702 \begin_layout Enumerate
17704 \begin_inset space ~
17708 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17718 \begin_layout Enumerate
17719 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17720 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17730 \begin_layout Enumerate
17731 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17735 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17745 \begin_layout Standard
17747 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17749 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17750 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17758 \begin_layout Subsection
17759 Dashes and Line Breaks
17760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17762 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17769 \begin_layout Standard
17770 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17771 case and locale, e.
17772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17778 \begin_layout Itemize
17779 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17780 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17783 \begin_layout Itemize
17784 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17788 \begin_layout Itemize
17789 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17790 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17793 \begin_layout Standard
17794 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17795 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17806 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17809 \begin_layout Enumerate
17810 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17814 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17816 The Elements of Typographic Style
17819 \begin_inset space ~
17822 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17825 \begin_layout Enumerate
17826 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17833 Prevent Hyphenation
17838 \begin_inset space ~
17854 in \SpecialChar TeX
17860 \begin_layout Itemize
17862 \begin_inset space ~
17866 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17876 height_special "totalheight"
17881 backgroundcolor "none"
17884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17893 \begin_layout Itemize
17897 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17907 height_special "totalheight"
17912 backgroundcolor "none"
17915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17927 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17931 – sont très utiles.
17934 \begin_layout Itemize
17941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17954 \begin_layout Standard
17955 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17956 \begin_inset space ~
17959 – in contrast to an overfull line
17960 \begin_inset space ~
17963 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17967 \begin_layout Standard
17968 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17972 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17973 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17974 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17979 \begin_layout Enumerate
17980 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17981 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17982 or \SpecialChar TeX
17988 \begin_layout Itemize
17992 \begin_inset space ~
17995 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17996 \begin_inset space ~
17999 – sont très utiles.
18003 \begin_layout Enumerate
18004 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18005 \begin_inset Newline newline
18010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18011 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18012 Optional line break
18018 \begin_layout Itemize
18019 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18020 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18021 should be followed by
18022 a line break opportunity.
18025 \begin_layout Standard
18026 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18033 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18044 \begin_layout Enumerate
18045 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18046 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18047 or en dashes (see section
18048 \begin_inset space ~
18052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18054 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18065 Changes and backwards compatibility
18068 \begin_layout Standard
18069 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18071 \begin_inset space ~
18074 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18075 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18084 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18085 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18093 \begin_layout Standard
18094 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18096 \begin_inset space ~
18099 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18101 prevents ligation to dashes.
18103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18110 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18115 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18116 after the input (unless the current text font is
18124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18125 The behavior was changed since
18126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18142 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18143 as non-breakable dashes.
18144 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18153 \begin_layout Standard
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18164 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18166 \begin_inset space ~
18169 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18174 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18175 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18177 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18181 If you used both literal and
18182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18189 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18191 \begin_inset space ~
18194 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18195 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18198 \begin_layout Subsection
18200 \begin_inset Index idx
18203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18212 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18219 \begin_layout Standard
18220 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18221 but automatically in the output.
18222 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18228 \begin_inset Index idx
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 following the rules of the document language.
18240 does not hyphenate text in the
18244 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18247 \begin_layout Standard
18249 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18253 font and with unusual constructs, like
18254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18262 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18263 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18264 This is done with the menu
18266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18269 \begin_inset space ~
18275 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18277 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18281 \begin_layout Standard
18282 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18283 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18294 would then see the hyphen
18295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18302 as a line break possibility.
18303 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18304 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18308 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18311 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18313 Prevent Hyphenation
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18326 \begin_layout Subsection
18328 \begin_inset Index idx
18331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18341 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18344 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18351 \begin_layout Standard
18352 When \SpecialChar LyX
18353 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18354 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18356 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18362 appropriate amount of space.
18363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18366 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18368 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18369 gets after another word.
18372 \begin_layout Standard
18373 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18374 not work in all cases.
18376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18387 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18388 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18391 \begin_layout Standard
18392 Here are some examples of
18396 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18404 \begin_layout Itemize
18409 \begin_layout Standard
18410 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18413 \begin_layout Itemize
18415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18419 this is too much space!
18422 \begin_layout Itemize
18427 \begin_layout Standard
18428 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18431 \begin_layout Standard
18432 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18435 \begin_layout Enumerate
18439 \begin_inset space ~
18444 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18445 \begin_inset space ~
18449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18451 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18456 \begin_inset Index idx
18459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18460 Spaces ! inter-word
18468 \begin_layout Enumerate
18472 \begin_inset space ~
18477 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18478 \begin_inset space ~
18482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18484 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18489 \begin_inset Index idx
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 \begin_layout Enumerate
18505 \begin_inset space ~
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18513 \begin_inset space ~
18520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18522 \begin_inset space ~
18527 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18528 This function is also bound to
18531 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18537 \begin_layout Standard
18538 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18541 \begin_layout Itemize
18543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18547 \begin_inset space \space{}
18550 this is too much space!
18553 \begin_layout Itemize
18554 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18558 \begin_layout Standard
18559 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18560 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18562 will take care of this.
18565 \begin_layout Standard
18566 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18570 \begin_inset space ~
18576 feature described in the section
18578 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18583 Additional Features
18588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18590 \begin_inset Index idx
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 Typography ! Quotation marks
18600 \begin_inset Index idx
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18604 Quotation marks | see
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 \begin_layout Standard
18636 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18637 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18638 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18648 The keyboard character,
18652 , generates this automatically.
18655 \begin_layout Standard
18656 You can specify what character the
18660 key produces by using the submenu
18666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18670 \begin_inset Index idx
18673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18674 Document ! Settings
18679 dialog and switching the
18683 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18684 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18686 \begin_inset space ~
18692 \begin_layout Labeling
18693 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18705 \begin_inset space ~
18709 \begin_inset space ~
18713 \begin_inset Quotes els
18717 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18731 \begin_inset Quotes els
18735 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18738 quotation marks (as common, e.
18739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18745 \begin_layout Labeling
18746 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18749 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18753 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18757 \begin_inset space ~
18761 \begin_inset space ~
18765 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18769 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18775 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18779 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18783 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18787 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18790 quotation marks (as common, e.
18791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18797 \begin_layout Labeling
18798 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18801 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18805 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18809 \begin_inset space ~
18813 \begin_inset space ~
18817 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18821 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18827 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18831 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18835 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18839 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18842 quotation marks (as common, e.
18843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18849 \begin_layout Labeling
18850 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18853 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18857 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18861 \begin_inset space ~
18865 \begin_inset space ~
18869 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18873 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18879 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18883 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18887 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18891 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18894 quotation marks (as common, e.
18895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18901 \begin_layout Labeling
18902 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18905 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18909 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18913 \begin_inset space ~
18917 \begin_inset space ~
18921 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18925 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18931 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18935 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18939 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18943 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18946 quotation marks (as common, e.
18947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18950 g., in Switzerland)
18953 \begin_layout Labeling
18954 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18957 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18961 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18965 \begin_inset space ~
18969 \begin_inset space ~
18973 \begin_inset Quotes als
18977 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18983 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18987 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18991 \begin_inset Quotes als
18995 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18998 quotation marks (as common, e.
18999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19005 \begin_layout Labeling
19006 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19009 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19013 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19017 \begin_inset space ~
19021 \begin_inset space ~
19025 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19029 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19035 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19039 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19043 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19047 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19050 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19053 \begin_layout Labeling
19054 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19057 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19061 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19065 \begin_inset space ~
19069 \begin_inset space ~
19073 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19077 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19083 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19087 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19091 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19095 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19098 quotation marks (as common, e.
19099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19102 g., in Great Britain)
19105 \begin_layout Labeling
19106 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19109 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19113 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19117 \begin_inset space ~
19121 \begin_inset space ~
19125 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19129 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19135 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19139 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19143 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19147 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19150 quotation marks (as common, e.
19151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19157 \begin_layout Labeling
19158 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19161 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19165 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19169 \begin_inset space ~
19173 \begin_inset space ~
19177 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19181 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19187 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19191 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19195 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19199 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19202 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19207 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19208 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19209 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19210 the inner marks differ).
19218 \begin_layout Labeling
19219 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19222 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19226 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19230 \begin_inset space ~
19234 \begin_inset space ~
19238 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19242 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19248 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19252 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19256 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19260 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19263 quotation marks (as common, e.
19264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19270 \begin_layout Labeling
19271 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19274 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19278 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19286 \begin_inset space ~
19290 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19294 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19300 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19304 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19308 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19312 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19315 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19318 \begin_layout Labeling
19319 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19320 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19328 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19338 \begin_inset space ~
19344 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19352 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19356 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19360 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19364 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19368 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19371 quotation marks (as common, e.
19372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19381 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19389 \begin_layout Labeling
19390 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19391 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19399 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19405 \begin_inset space ~
19409 \begin_inset space ~
19415 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19423 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19427 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19431 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19435 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19439 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19442 quotation marks (as common, e.
19443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19446 g., in North Korea and China)
19450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19451 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19452 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19460 \begin_layout Standard
19461 Inner quotation marks
19465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19467 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19468 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19476 does not necessarily mean
19477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19485 This is why we call them
19486 \begin_inset Quotes els
19490 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19506 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19508 \begin_inset Quotes els
19512 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19515 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19518 arg "quote-insert inner"
19523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19529 \begin_layout Standard
19530 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19531 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19532 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19533 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19534 If you check the setting
19536 Use dynamic quotation marks
19540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19544 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19545 they appear in a special color).
19546 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19547 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19549 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19552 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19555 \begin_layout Standard
19556 Individual quotation marks (i.
19557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19560 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19561 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19565 \begin_layout Subsection
19567 \begin_inset Index idx
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19571 Typography ! Ligatures
19577 \begin_inset Index idx
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19611 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19618 \begin_layout Standard
19619 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19620 print them as single characters.
19621 These groups are known as
19626 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19627 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19629 Here are the standard ligatures:
19632 \begin_layout Itemize
19636 \begin_layout Itemize
19640 \begin_layout Itemize
19644 \begin_layout Itemize
19648 \begin_layout Itemize
19652 \begin_layout Standard
19653 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19656 \begin_layout Standard
19657 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19658 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19666 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19682 To break a ligature, use
19684 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19685 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19687 \begin_inset space ~
19694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19705 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19722 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19730 \begin_layout Subsection
19732 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19734 \begin_inset Index idx
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 \begin_layout Standard
19750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19751 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19755 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19758 \begin_layout Description
19760 The name of the game.
19763 \begin_layout Description
19765 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19769 \begin_layout Description
19771 The \SpecialChar TeX
19772 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19776 \begin_layout Description
19777 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19778 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19782 \begin_layout Standard
19783 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19789 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19797 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19798 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19799 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19800 converges to the number
19801 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19804 : The actual version is
19805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19813 , the previous one was
19814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19825 \begin_layout Subsection
19827 \begin_inset Index idx
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19839 \begin_layout Standard
19840 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19841 space between two words.
19842 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19852 for units use the menu
19854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19855 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19857 \begin_inset space ~
19865 arg "space-insert thin"
19871 \begin_layout Standard
19872 Here is an example to show the differences:
19875 \begin_layout Standard
19876 \begin_inset Tabular
19877 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19878 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19879 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19880 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 \begin_inset space ~
19891 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 space between number and unit
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19919 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 half space between number and unit
19944 \begin_layout Subsection
19946 \begin_inset Index idx
19949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19950 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19958 \begin_layout Standard
19959 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19961 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19962 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19963 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19964 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19965 These bits of text became known as
19976 \begin_layout Standard
19977 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19978 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19979 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19980 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19981 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19982 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19983 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19984 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19985 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19986 \begin_inset Newline newline
19994 \begin_inset Newline newline
20002 \begin_inset Newline newline
20005 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20006 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20007 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20009 \begin_inset space ~
20013 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20015 key "latexcompanion"
20021 \begin_inset space ~
20025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20032 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20033 's page break mechanism.
20036 \begin_layout Chapter
20037 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20040 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20047 \begin_layout Standard
20048 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20051 \begin_inset space ~
20057 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20060 \begin_layout Section
20062 \begin_inset Index idx
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20081 \begin_layout Standard
20083 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20086 \begin_layout Description
20089 \begin_inset space ~
20092 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20093 \begin_inset Newline newline
20097 \begin_inset Note Note
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20109 \begin_layout Description
20110 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20111 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20112 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20115 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20116 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20118 \begin_inset space ~
20124 \begin_inset Newline newline
20128 \begin_inset Note Comment
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20141 \begin_layout Description
20143 \begin_inset space ~
20146 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20147 set in the document settings under
20149 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20151 \begin_inset space ~
20157 \begin_inset Newline newline
20161 \begin_inset Newline newline
20165 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20174 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20175 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20180 of a comment that appears in the output.
20186 \begin_inset Newline newline
20190 \begin_inset Newline newline
20193 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20196 \begin_layout Standard
20197 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20209 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20212 \begin_layout Section
20214 \begin_inset Index idx
20217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20226 name "sec:Footnotes"
20233 \begin_layout Standard
20235 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20241 or the toolbar button
20244 arg "footnote-insert"
20256 \begin_inset Graphics
20257 filename clipart/footnote.png
20266 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20267 's representation of your footnote.
20277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20296 label, the box will
20300 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20301 Clicking on the box label again will close
20314 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20315 and click on the footnote
20330 \begin_layout Standard
20331 Here is an example footnote:
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20348 \begin_layout Standard
20349 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20350 position where the footnote box is placed.
20351 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20352 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20353 according to the document class.
20355 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20356 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20362 ey are described in the
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20373 \begin_layout Section
20375 \begin_inset Index idx
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20387 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20394 \begin_layout Standard
20395 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20397 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20399 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20401 \begin_inset space ~
20406 or the toolbar button
20409 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20435 appearing within your text.
20436 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20437 's representation of your margin
20446 \begin_layout Standard
20447 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20451 \begin_inset Marginal
20454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 This is a marginal note.
20464 \begin_layout Standard
20465 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20466 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20467 pages, right on odd pages.
20470 \begin_layout Standard
20471 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20474 \begin_inset space ~
20482 \begin_inset space ~
20490 \begin_layout Section
20491 Graphics and Images
20492 \begin_inset Index idx
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20502 \begin_inset Index idx
20505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20514 name "sec:Graphics"
20521 \begin_layout Standard
20522 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20523 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20526 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20535 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20538 \begin_layout Standard
20539 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20544 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20545 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20547 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20548 \begin_inset space ~
20552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20554 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20561 \begin_layout Standard
20566 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20567 of the image in the output.
20568 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20572 \begin_inset space ~
20576 \begin_inset space ~
20585 \begin_inset space ~
20589 \begin_inset space ~
20593 \begin_inset space ~
20598 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20599 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20607 \begin_layout Standard
20611 \begin_inset space ~
20615 \begin_inset space ~
20620 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20621 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20623 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20628 \begin_inset space ~
20633 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20634 with the image size is printed.
20637 \begin_layout Standard
20638 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20639 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20641 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20644 \begin_layout Standard
20646 \begin_inset Graphics
20647 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20655 \begin_layout Standard
20656 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20657 the image into a float, see section
20658 \begin_inset space ~
20662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20664 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20671 \begin_layout Subsection
20673 \begin_inset Index idx
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20685 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20692 \begin_layout Standard
20693 You can insert images in any known file format.
20694 But as we explained in section
20695 \begin_inset space ~
20699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20701 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20705 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20707 therefore uses the program
20711 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20712 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20713 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20714 \begin_inset space ~
20718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20720 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20727 \begin_layout Standard
20728 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20731 \begin_layout Description
20733 \begin_inset space ~
20736 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20737 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20738 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20742 Graphics Interchange Format
20743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20746 (GIF, file extension
20747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20759 \begin_inset Index idx
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20794 Portable Network Graphics
20795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20798 (PNG, file extension
20799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20811 \begin_inset Index idx
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20846 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20850 (JPG, file extension
20851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20875 \begin_inset Index idx
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 \begin_layout Description
20911 \begin_inset space ~
20914 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20916 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20917 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20918 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20919 \begin_inset Newline newline
20922 Scalable image formats can be
20923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20926 Scalable Vector Graphics
20927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20930 (SVG, file extension
20931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20943 \begin_inset Index idx
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20978 Encapsulated PostScript
20979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20982 (EPS, file extension
20983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20995 \begin_inset Index idx
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21030 Portable Document Format
21031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21034 (PDF, file extension
21035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21047 \begin_inset Index idx
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21065 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21066 result will not be scalable.
21067 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21081 \begin_layout Standard
21082 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21089 \begin_layout Subsection
21090 Grouping of Image Settings
21091 \begin_inset Index idx
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 Images ! Settings grouping
21103 \begin_layout Standard
21104 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21106 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21107 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21109 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21110 need to manually change each of them.
21114 \begin_layout Standard
21115 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21118 \begin_inset space ~
21122 \begin_inset space ~
21134 \begin_inset space ~
21138 \begin_inset space ~
21144 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21145 and checking the name of the desired group.
21148 \begin_layout Section
21150 \begin_inset Index idx
21153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21169 \begin_layout Standard
21170 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21173 arg "tabular-insert"
21178 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21182 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21183 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21184 from the rest of the table.
21185 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21186 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21188 Here is an example table:
21191 \begin_layout Standard
21193 \begin_inset Tabular
21194 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21195 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21399 \begin_layout Subsection
21403 \begin_layout Standard
21404 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21407 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21411 This brings up the table dialog.
21412 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21413 cursor is placed currently.
21414 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21415 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21416 done on all of your selection.
21419 \begin_layout Standard
21420 In addition to the table dialog, the
21423 \begin_inset space ~
21428 helps you in setting table properties.
21429 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21432 \begin_layout Standard
21436 \begin_inset space ~
21441 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21442 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21443 current cell respectively.
21444 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21446 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21447 of text, see section
21448 \begin_inset space ~
21452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21454 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21461 \begin_layout Standard
21462 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21463 using the check box
21472 This will merge the cells to
21476 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21477 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21478 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21479 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21480 in the last row without the upper border:
21483 \begin_layout Standard
21485 \begin_inset Tabular
21486 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21487 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21488 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21489 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21490 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21491 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 \begin_layout Standard
21623 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21624 -arguments for the table.
21625 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21626 explained in the chapter
21633 \begin_inset space ~
21639 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21640 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21641 but are visible in the output.
21644 \begin_layout Standard
21645 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 Most DVI-viewers are
21657 able to display rotations.
21665 \begin_layout Standard
21670 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21675 adds lines for all cell borders.
21678 \begin_layout Subsection
21680 \begin_inset Index idx
21683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 Tables ! Multi-page
21690 \begin_inset Index idx
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 \begin_layout Standard
21703 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21706 \begin_inset space ~
21710 \begin_inset space ~
21718 \begin_inset space ~
21723 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21724 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21727 \begin_layout Description
21732 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21733 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21734 Except for the first page, if
21737 \begin_inset space ~
21745 \begin_layout Description
21749 \begin_inset space ~
21754 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21755 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21758 \begin_layout Description
21763 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21764 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21765 except for the last page, if
21768 \begin_inset space ~
21776 \begin_layout Description
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21785 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21786 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21789 \begin_layout Description
21790 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21791 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21797 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21800 \begin_inset space ~
21808 \begin_layout Standard
21809 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21810 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21811 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21817 In this context, first means first in this order:
21820 \begin_inset space ~
21832 \begin_inset space ~
21837 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21840 \begin_layout Standard
21842 \begin_inset Tabular
21843 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21844 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21845 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21846 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21847 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21848 <row endfirsthead="true">
21849 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21855 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21860 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <row endfirsthead="true">
21880 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21912 <row endhead="true">
21913 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21924 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 <row endhead="true">
21944 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21976 <row endfoot="true">
21977 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21988 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22987 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <row endlastfoot="true">
23959 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23996 \begin_layout Subsection
23998 \begin_inset Index idx
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24010 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24017 \begin_layout Standard
24018 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24019 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24020 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24021 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24025 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24028 \begin_layout Standard
24029 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24030 for the column in the table dialog.
24031 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24032 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24036 \begin_layout Standard
24038 \begin_inset Tabular
24039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24040 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24041 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24042 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 This is longer now.
24193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24245 This is longer now.
24250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 \begin_layout Standard
24277 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24278 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24284 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24290 Selection with the mouse or with
24294 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24295 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24296 the selection from outside the table.
24299 \begin_layout Section
24301 \begin_inset Index idx
24304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24320 \begin_layout Subsection
24324 \begin_layout Standard
24325 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24326 have a fixed location.
24328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24335 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24343 \begin_inset space ~
24348 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24349 too many notes on the current page.
24352 \begin_layout Standard
24353 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24354 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24355 and pages without text.
24356 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24357 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24358 Floats are therefore numbered.
24359 Referencing is described in section
24360 \begin_inset space ~
24364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24366 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24373 \begin_layout Standard
24374 To insert a float, use the menu
24376 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24380 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24381 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24383 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24384 \begin_inset Index idx
24387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24394 paragraph within the float.
24395 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24396 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24397 left-clicking on the box label.
24398 A closed float box looks like this:
24399 \begin_inset Graphics
24400 filename clipart/float.png
24405 – a gray button with a red label.
24408 \begin_layout Standard
24409 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24411 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24414 \begin_layout Subsection
24416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24418 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24423 \begin_inset Index idx
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 Floats ! Figure floats
24435 \begin_layout Standard
24437 \begin_inset space ~
24441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24443 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24447 was created using the menu
24449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24450 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24456 arg "float-insert figure"
24460 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24463 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24469 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24473 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24474 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24476 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24478 \begin_inset space ~
24486 arg "layout-paragraph"
24492 \begin_layout Standard
24493 \begin_inset Float figure
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24502 \begin_inset Graphics
24503 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24513 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24518 name "fig:A-star-in"
24535 \begin_layout Standard
24536 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24537 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24548 ) and refer to it using the menu
24550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24556 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24560 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24561 vague references like
24562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24569 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24570 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24580 For more about cross-references, see section
24581 \begin_inset space ~
24585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24587 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24594 \begin_layout Standard
24595 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24596 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24597 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24598 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24599 as described in section
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24606 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24612 \begin_inset space ~
24616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24618 reference "fig:Two-images"
24622 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24623 You can also set the images one below the other.
24625 \begin_inset space ~
24629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24631 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24638 reference "fig:Star"
24642 are the subfigures.
24645 \begin_layout Standard
24646 \begin_inset Float figure
24653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24658 \begin_inset Float figure
24665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24666 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24671 name "fig:Undefinable"
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24684 \begin_inset Graphics
24685 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24697 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24701 \begin_inset Float figure
24708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24709 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24712 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 \begin_inset Graphics
24728 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24740 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24752 name "fig:Two-images"
24769 \begin_layout Subsection
24771 \begin_inset Index idx
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24775 Floats ! Table floats
24783 \begin_layout Standard
24784 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24787 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24790 or the toolbar button
24793 arg "float-insert table"
24797 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24798 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24799 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24801 \begin_inset space ~
24805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24807 reference "tab:Table-float"
24814 \begin_layout Standard
24815 \begin_inset Float table
24822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24823 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24828 name "tab:Table-float"
24840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24842 \begin_inset Tabular
24843 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24844 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24845 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24846 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24847 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24974 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24998 \end{array}\right]$
25006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25040 \begin_layout Subsection
25042 \begin_inset Index idx
25045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_layout Standard
25056 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25057 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25058 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25060 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25068 \begin_inset space ~
25076 \begin_layout Section
25078 \begin_inset Index idx
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25090 \begin_layout Standard
25092 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25094 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25095 \begin_inset space \space{}
25102 \begin_layout Standard
25103 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25104 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25110 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25111 and its alignment within the page.
25114 \begin_layout Standard
25116 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25126 height_special "totalheight"
25131 backgroundcolor "none"
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 This is a minipage.
25138 The text is set in an italic style.
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25145 another formatting.
25153 \begin_layout Standard
25154 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25157 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25161 as described in section
25162 \begin_inset space ~
25166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25168 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25173 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25179 \begin_layout Standard
25180 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25190 height_special "totalheight"
25195 backgroundcolor "none"
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25200 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25206 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25210 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25220 height_special "totalheight"
25225 backgroundcolor "none"
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25230 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25238 \begin_layout Standard
25239 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25245 \begin_layout Standard
25246 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25248 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25255 \begin_inset space ~
25263 \begin_layout Chapter
25264 Mathematical Formulas
25265 \begin_inset Index idx
25268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25275 \begin_inset Index idx
25278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25309 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25316 \begin_layout Standard
25317 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25322 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25325 \begin_layout Section
25327 \begin_inset Index idx
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 \begin_layout Standard
25340 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25353 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25355 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25356 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25357 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25365 \begin_layout Standard
25366 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25370 \begin_inset space ~
25375 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25378 \begin_layout Standard
25379 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25380 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25383 \begin_layout Standard
25384 This is a line with an inline formula
25385 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25391 \begin_layout Standard
25392 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25393 paragraph, like this one:
25394 \begin_inset Formula
25401 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25404 \begin_layout Standard
25406 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25408 For example, typing
25409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25422 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25423 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25427 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25430 \begin_inset space ~
25438 \begin_layout Subsection
25439 Navigating in Formulas
25440 \begin_inset Index idx
25443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 \begin_layout Standard
25453 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25454 achieved with the arrow keys.
25456 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25457 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25462 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25463 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25467 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25471 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25474 \end{array}\right]$
25482 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25487 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25488 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25496 , printed in this document as
25497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25501 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25508 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25509 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25510 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25515 For example, if you want
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25524 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25534 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25538 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25543 , since in the latter case only the
25546 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25551 will be under the square root sign:
25552 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25561 \begin_inset Formula
25563 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25572 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25573 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25576 \begin_layout Subsection
25580 \begin_layout Standard
25581 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25582 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25586 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25587 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25588 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25589 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25590 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25594 \begin_layout Subsection
25595 Exponents and Subscripts
25596 \begin_inset Index idx
25599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25606 \begin_inset Index idx
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25618 \begin_layout Standard
25619 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25622 arg "math-superscript"
25628 arg "math-subscript"
25631 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25633 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25636 , type in a formula
25639 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25649 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25655 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25659 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25665 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25671 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25680 , you have to use an extra
25684 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25685 For example, if you want
25686 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25692 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25698 Subscripts are similar: To get
25699 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25705 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25713 \begin_layout Subsection
25715 \begin_inset Index idx
25718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25727 \begin_layout Standard
25728 Create a fraction either with the command
25734 or by using the icon
25737 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25743 \begin_inset space ~
25749 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25750 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25751 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25756 To move back up, press
25761 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25762 \begin_inset Formula
25764 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25767 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25775 \begin_layout Subsection
25777 \begin_inset Index idx
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25789 \begin_layout Standard
25790 Roots can be created using the
25793 \begin_inset space ~
25801 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25807 arg "math-insert \\root"
25829 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25835 always produces a square root.
25838 \begin_layout Subsection
25839 Operators with Limits
25840 \begin_inset Index idx
25843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 \begin_inset Index idx
25853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25862 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25869 \begin_layout Standard
25871 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25875 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25878 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25879 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25880 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25881 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25882 The sum operator will automatically place its
25883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25890 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25892 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25896 \begin_inset Formula
25898 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25903 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25907 \begin_layout Standard
25908 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25910 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25911 behind the operator and using the menu
25913 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25914 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25916 \begin_inset space ~
25920 \begin_inset space ~
25934 \begin_layout Standard
25935 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25944 \begin_inset Index idx
25947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25954 \begin_inset Formula
25956 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25961 which will place the
25962 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25974 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25975 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25981 \begin_layout Standard
25982 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25989 Have a look at section
25990 \begin_inset space ~
25994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25996 reference "subsec:Functions"
26000 for an explanation of function macros.
26003 \begin_layout Subsection
26005 \begin_inset Index idx
26008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26017 \begin_layout Standard
26018 Most math symbols can be found in the
26021 \begin_inset space ~
26026 under one of several categories; including
26043 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26047 \begin_layout Standard
26048 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26049 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26050 don't have to use the
26053 \begin_inset space ~
26058 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26060 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26063 \begin_layout Subsection
26065 \begin_inset Index idx
26068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26078 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26084 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26090 \begin_inset space ~
26098 arg "math-insert \\space"
26102 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26103 For example, the sequence
26108 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26111 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26113 \begin_inset Graphics
26114 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26119 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26120 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26121 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26122 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26123 , because they are negative
26125 Here are two examples:
26128 \begin_layout Standard
26138 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26144 \begin_layout Standard
26154 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26160 \begin_layout Subsection
26162 \begin_inset Index idx
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26174 name "subsec:Functions"
26181 \begin_layout Standard
26185 \begin_inset space ~
26190 contains under the button
26193 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26196 a number of function macros, such as
26197 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26201 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26209 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26216 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26217 avoid confusions, because
26218 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26222 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26228 \begin_layout Standard
26229 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26231 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26235 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26242 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26243 are placed, as described in section
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26250 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26257 \begin_layout Subsection
26259 \begin_inset Index idx
26262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26271 \begin_layout Standard
26272 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26274 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26275 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26276 commands, for example, to enter
26277 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26280 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26281 Our example is entered by typing
26286 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26293 \begin_inset space ~
26297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26299 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26303 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26306 \begin_layout Standard
26307 \begin_inset Float table
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26320 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26324 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_inset Tabular
26335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26336 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26337 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26338 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26339 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26477 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26531 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26639 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26747 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26801 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26855 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26921 \begin_layout Standard
26922 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26925 \begin_inset space ~
26933 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26936 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26940 \begin_layout Section
26941 Brackets and Delimiters
26942 \begin_inset Index idx
26945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 \begin_inset Index idx
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26964 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26971 \begin_layout Standard
26972 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26974 For some purposes, using just the keys
26979 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26980 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26981 toolbar delimiter icon
26984 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26988 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26989 \begin_inset Formula
26991 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26999 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27000 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27004 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27007 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27013 \begin_inset Formula
27015 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27025 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27029 \begin_layout Standard
27030 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27031 left side and right side.
27032 If you use the option
27035 \begin_inset space ~
27040 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27041 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27043 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27048 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27049 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27052 \begin_layout Standard
27053 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27054 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27055 is to go inside the brackets.
27056 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27061 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27062 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27063 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27067 arg "math-delim ( )"
27073 \begin_layout Section
27074 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27075 \begin_inset Index idx
27078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27085 \begin_inset Index idx
27088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27095 \begin_inset Index idx
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27099 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27107 \begin_layout Standard
27108 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27112 \begin_inset space ~
27120 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27124 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27125 Here is an example:
27126 \begin_inset Formula
27128 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27137 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27138 \begin_inset space ~
27142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27144 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27149 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27150 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27151 This alignment is set in the box
27156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27205 for every column as default.
27206 For example, the sequence
27207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27218 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27219 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27220 corresponds to the relevant column.
27221 The result will look like this:
27222 \begin_inset Formula
27225 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27226 column & has & has\,right\\
27227 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27236 \begin_layout Standard
27237 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27240 arg "newline-insert newline"
27243 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27244 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27246 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27249 or the math toolbar.
27252 \begin_layout Standard
27253 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27254 It can be created with the menu
27256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27257 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27259 \begin_inset space ~
27271 Here is an example:
27272 \begin_inset Formula
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27290 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27293 arg "newline-insert newline"
27297 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27302 arg "newline-insert newline"
27305 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27313 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27314 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27315 A new row is created by every further entry of
27318 arg "newline-insert newline"
27322 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27323 Here is an example:
27324 \begin_inset Formula
27326 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27327 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27332 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27333 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27334 \begin_inset Formula
27336 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27352 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27353 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 reference "eq:asquared"
27361 The other types are described in section
27362 \begin_inset space ~
27366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27368 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27375 \begin_layout Section
27376 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27377 \begin_inset Index idx
27380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27381 Math ! Formula numbering
27387 \begin_inset Index idx
27390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27391 Math ! Referencing formulas
27397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27399 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27406 \begin_layout Standard
27407 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27409 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27410 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27412 \begin_inset space ~
27416 \begin_inset space ~
27424 arg "math-number-toggle"
27428 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27429 within parentheses.
27430 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27431 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27432 the document class.
27433 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27434 separated by a dot:
27435 \begin_inset Formula
27445 arg "math-number-toggle"
27448 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27449 You can only number displayed formulas.
27452 \begin_layout Standard
27453 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27456 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27458 \begin_inset space ~
27462 \begin_inset space ~
27470 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27473 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27474 \begin_inset Formula
27477 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27483 To number all lines use the shortcut
27486 arg "math-number-toggle"
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27493 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27496 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27497 A label is inserted with the menu
27499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27508 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27509 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27510 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27522 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27523 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27524 We inserted in the following example the label
27525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27532 in the second line:
27533 \begin_inset Formula
27535 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27536 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27541 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27542 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27543 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27547 \begin_inset space ~
27555 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27559 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27560 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27561 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27562 as the formula number:
27565 \begin_layout Standard
27566 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27569 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27576 \begin_layout Standard
27577 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27578 's cross-reference box are described in section
27579 \begin_inset space ~
27583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27585 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27590 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27598 \begin_layout Section
27599 User defined math macros
27600 \begin_inset Index idx
27603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27612 \begin_layout Standard
27614 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27615 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27616 Math macros are explained in section
27619 \begin_inset space ~
27631 \begin_layout Section
27635 \begin_layout Subsection
27637 \begin_inset Index idx
27640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27649 \begin_layout Standard
27650 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27651 To set a font in a formula, use the
27654 \begin_inset space ~
27662 arg "math-insert \\font"
27665 , or enter its command, listed in table
27666 \begin_inset space ~
27670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27672 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27679 \begin_layout Standard
27680 \begin_inset Float table
27687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27693 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27697 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 \begin_inset Tabular
27708 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27709 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27711 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27770 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27797 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27830 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27857 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27945 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27979 \begin_layout Standard
27980 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28004 \begin_layout Standard
28005 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28006 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28011 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28012 space when you need a space in the box.
28013 Here is an example where
28014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28025 denotes the set of numbers:
28026 \begin_inset Formula
28028 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28037 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28038 You can, for example, put a character in
28047 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28051 \begin_inset Newline newline
28054 So it is better not to use this feature.
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28058 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28059 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28063 \begin_inset Newline newline
28066 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28072 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28073 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28079 \begin_layout Standard
28086 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28089 \begin_layout Standard
28090 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28093 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28095 \begin_inset space ~
28103 \begin_layout Subsection
28105 \begin_inset Index idx
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28120 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28124 \begin_inset space ~
28128 \begin_inset space ~
28136 \begin_inset space ~
28144 arg "math-insert \\font"
28148 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28149 in black instead of blue.
28150 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28151 Here is an example:
28152 \begin_inset Formula
28155 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28156 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28165 \begin_layout Subsection
28167 \begin_inset Index idx
28170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28181 automatically chosen in most situations.
28199 For most characters,
28207 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28208 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28213 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28214 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28215 thinks are appropriate.
28216 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28219 arg "math-insert \\style"
28223 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28224 For example, you can set
28225 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28228 , which is normally in
28237 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28241 The four styles are used in the following example:
28244 \begin_layout Standard
28245 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28249 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28253 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28257 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28263 \begin_layout Standard
28264 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28265 is set in a particular size with the menu
28267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28269 \begin_inset space ~
28274 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28275 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28276 will be adjusted to correspond.
28277 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28292 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28298 \begin_layout Section
28299 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28301 \begin_inset Index idx
28304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28311 \begin_inset Index idx
28314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28323 \begin_layout Standard
28325 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28326 that are in common use.
28329 \begin_layout Subsection
28330 Enabling AMS-Support
28333 \begin_layout Standard
28334 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28335 the document by selecting the checkbox
28338 \begin_inset space ~
28342 \begin_inset space ~
28346 \begin_inset space ~
28353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28357 \begin_inset Index idx
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 Document ! Settings
28369 \begin_inset space ~
28375 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28376 -errors in formulas,
28377 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28380 \begin_layout Subsection
28382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28384 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28389 \begin_inset Index idx
28392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28393 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28401 \begin_layout Standard
28402 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28403 provides a selection of different formula types.
28405 allows you to choose between
28426 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28434 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28437 \begin_layout Chapter
28441 \begin_layout Section
28443 \begin_inset Index idx
28446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28455 name "sec:Cross-References"
28462 \begin_layout Standard
28463 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28464 's strengths is cross-references.
28465 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28467 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28468 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28469 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28472 \begin_layout Enumerate
28476 \begin_layout Enumerate
28477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28479 name "enu:Second-item"
28486 \begin_layout Enumerate
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28496 or by pressing the toolbar button
28503 A gray label box like this:
28504 \begin_inset Graphics
28505 filename clipart/label.png
28509 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28511 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28546 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28547 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28563 \begin_layout Standard
28564 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28569 or the toolbar button
28572 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28576 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28577 \begin_inset Graphics
28578 filename clipart/reference.png
28582 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28584 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28597 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28601 \begin_layout Standard
28602 As an alternative to
28604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28607 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28612 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28613 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28628 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28629 \begin_inset space ~
28633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28635 reference "enu:Second-item"
28642 \begin_layout Standard
28643 It is recommended to use a protected space
28647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28648 described in section
28649 \begin_inset space ~
28653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28655 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28664 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28665 line breaks between them.
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28669 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28672 \begin_layout Description
28673 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28676 reference "fig:Two-images"
28683 \begin_layout Description
28684 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28685 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28697 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28704 \begin_layout Description
28705 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28706 \begin_inset space ~
28710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28711 LatexCommand pageref
28712 reference "fig:Two-images"
28719 \begin_layout Description
28721 \begin_inset space ~
28725 \begin_inset space ~
28728 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28730 LatexCommand vpageref
28731 reference "fig:Two-images"
28736 \begin_inset Newline newline
28739 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28740 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28741 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28742 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28743 it prints “on the next page”.
28744 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28747 \begin_layout Description
28749 \begin_inset space ~
28753 \begin_inset space ~
28757 \begin_inset space ~
28760 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28763 reference "fig:Two-images"
28768 \begin_inset Newline newline
28771 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28777 ; otherwise it behaves like
28781 \begin_inset space ~
28785 \begin_inset space ~
28794 \begin_layout Description
28796 \begin_inset space ~
28799 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28800 \begin_inset Newline newline
28804 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28812 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28822 \begin_inset Index idx
28825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28827 packages ! prettyref
28833 \begin_inset Index idx
28836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28838 packages ! refstyle
28849 \begin_inset Newline newline
28852 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28853 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28856 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28861 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28869 is the default and preferred because
28873 supports only English documents.
28874 The format is specified by using the command
28886 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28887 preamble of the document.
28888 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 \begin_inset Newline newline
28913 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28918 \begin_inset Newline newline
28929 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28930 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28932 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28933 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28938 , you might do so as follows:
28939 \begin_inset Newline newline
28946 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28951 \begin_inset Newline newline
28954 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28955 the package documentation
28956 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28958 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28964 \begin_inset Newline newline
28975 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28982 \begin_layout Description
28984 \begin_inset space ~
28987 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28989 LatexCommand nameref
28990 reference "fig:Two-images"
28997 \begin_layout Description
28999 \begin_inset space ~
29002 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29003 label for the reference:
29004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29005 LatexCommand labelonly
29006 reference "fig:Two-images"
29011 \begin_inset Newline newline
29014 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29015 Code, if you want to issue a command
29016 that \SpecialChar LyX
29022 , then you may want to use the
29025 \begin_inset space ~
29030 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29040 This is the form needed for e.
29041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29045 \begin_inset space \space{}
29052 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29053 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29055 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29059 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29063 \begin_layout Standard
29064 You can only use the style
29068 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29072 is always possible.
29075 \begin_layout Standard
29076 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29077 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29079 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29086 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29098 \begin_inset space ~
29102 \begin_inset space ~
29107 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29108 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29111 \begin_inset space ~
29116 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29117 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29120 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 You can change labels at any time.
29128 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29129 do not need to think about this.
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29133 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29135 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 References are described in detail in the section
29141 \begin_inset space ~
29151 \begin_inset space ~
29159 \begin_layout Section
29160 Table of Contents and other Listings
29161 \begin_inset Index idx
29164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29171 \begin_inset Index idx
29174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29175 Navigating ! Outline
29181 \begin_inset Index idx
29184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29200 \begin_layout Subsection
29202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29204 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29211 \begin_layout Standard
29212 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29215 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29217 \begin_inset space ~
29221 \begin_inset space ~
29227 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29229 If you click on it, the
29233 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29234 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29235 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29237 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29239 \begin_inset space ~
29244 that is described in section
29245 \begin_inset space ~
29249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29251 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29258 \begin_layout Standard
29259 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29260 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29262 \begin_inset space ~
29266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29268 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29272 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29274 \begin_inset space ~
29278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29280 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29284 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29286 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29289 \begin_layout Subsection
29290 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29293 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29300 \begin_layout Standard
29301 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29303 You can insert them via the
29305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29309 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29312 \begin_layout Section
29313 URLs and Hyperlinks
29314 \begin_inset Index idx
29317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29324 \begin_inset Index idx
29327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29336 \begin_layout Subsection
29338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29347 \begin_layout Standard
29348 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29356 \begin_layout Standard
29357 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29359 \begin_inset Flex URL
29362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29364 https://www.lyx.org
29372 \begin_layout Standard
29373 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29379 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29383 \begin_layout Standard
29384 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29392 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29401 \begin_layout Subsection
29403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29405 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29412 \begin_layout Standard
29413 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29418 or with the toolbar button
29425 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29434 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29435 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29438 name "LyX's homepage"
29439 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29444 , an Email address like this:
29445 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29447 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29448 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29454 , or a link to a file.
29459 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29467 \begin_layout Standard
29468 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29481 to the link target.
29484 \begin_layout Standard
29485 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29486 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29487 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29488 the text style dialog.
29489 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29495 name "LyX's homepage"
29496 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29504 \begin_layout Standard
29505 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29509 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29512 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29516 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29518 \begin_inset Newline newline
29526 \begin_inset Newline newline
29533 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29536 \begin_layout Section
29538 \begin_inset Index idx
29541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29550 name "sec:Appendices"
29557 \begin_layout Standard
29558 Appendices are created with the menu
29560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29562 \begin_inset space ~
29566 \begin_inset space ~
29572 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29573 as the appendix part of the book.
29574 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29578 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29579 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29580 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29581 and the subsection number.
29582 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29586 \begin_layout Standard
29588 \begin_inset space ~
29592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29594 reference "chap:Credits"
29599 \begin_inset space ~
29603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29605 reference "subsec:Export"
29612 \begin_layout Section
29614 \begin_inset Index idx
29617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29626 name "sec:Bibliography"
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29636 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29637 \begin_inset space ~
29641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29643 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29650 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29655 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29656 \begin_inset space ~
29660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29662 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29667 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29668 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29669 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29673 using a bibliography database.
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29677 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29678 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29682 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29683 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29684 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29685 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29686 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29689 \begin_layout Subsection
29690 The Bibliography Environment
29691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29693 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29700 \begin_layout Standard
29705 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29707 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29716 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29718 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29719 of ASCII characters only.
29723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29725 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29728 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29734 \begin_inset Newline newline
29738 \begin_inset Flex URL
29741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29743 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29753 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29763 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29764 \begin_inset Newline newline
29771 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29772 the number of the entry.
29777 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29792 or the toolbar button
29795 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29799 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29800 containing the available citations.
29801 Select one or more keys from the list and
29811 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29812 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29816 \begin_layout Standard
29817 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29818 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29819 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29831 \begin_layout Standard
29835 Companion Second Edition
29838 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29840 key "latexcompanion"
29848 \begin_layout Standard
29849 The \SpecialChar LyX
29850 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29851 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29861 \begin_layout Standard
29862 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29869 \begin_inset Index idx
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29880 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29892 Author A and Author B(Year)
29893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29900 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29902 Then, if you select
29905 \begin_inset space ~
29910 in the document settings
29911 \begin_inset Index idx
29914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29915 Document ! Settings
29922 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29924 \begin_inset space ~
29930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29932 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29939 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29943 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29948 \begin_inset space ~
29956 arg "layout-paragraph"
29960 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29963 \begin_layout Subsection
29964 Bibliography databases
29965 \begin_inset Index idx
29968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29969 Bibliography ! Databases
29975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29977 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29985 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29991 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29993 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29994 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29999 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30001 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30002 your working field in a database.
30003 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30004 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30005 list for that document.
30006 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30011 The database is a text file with the file extension
30012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30023 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30024 The format is explained in
30025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30032 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30034 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30036 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30042 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30043 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30044 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30046 \begin_inset Flex URL
30049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30051 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30059 \begin_layout Standard
30061 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30062 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30063 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30065 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30067 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30068 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30069 Those are addressed by
30074 \begin_inset Index idx
30077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30079 packages ! biblatex
30085 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30086 (although it has been significantly
30087 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30097 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30098 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30099 might conversely fail to correctly
30100 handle databases that use specific
30109 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30113 \begin_layout Standard
30114 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30119 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30125 \begin_inset Index idx
30128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30129 Document ! Settings
30141 \begin_inset space ~
30146 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30155 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30157 \begin_inset Index idx
30160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30161 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30171 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30179 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30181 \begin_inset space ~
30187 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30188 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30196 Add bibliography to TOC
30198 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30203 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30204 in the document or just the cited references.
30206 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30211 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30212 differ from the encoding of the document.
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30218 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30219 style file is a text file with the file extension
30220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30232 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30233 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30234 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30236 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30242 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30243 \begin_inset Newline newline
30247 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30249 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30259 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30264 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30272 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30274 \begin_inset Index idx
30277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30284 \begin_inset Index idx
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 packages ! biblatex
30297 \begin_layout Standard
30298 Accessing a database via
30302 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30310 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30312 \begin_inset space ~
30318 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30319 you cannot select a
30324 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30328 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30331 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30332 As for the styles, note the following.
30337 \begin_layout Standard
30342 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30355 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30356 file (text file with the file extension
30357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30368 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30369 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30371 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30380 styles are not set in the
30383 \begin_inset space ~
30388 dialog, but in the document settings.
30389 \begin_inset Index idx
30392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30393 Document ! Settings
30398 However, in the dialog in the
30402 field, which is only visible if you use
30406 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30407 example how its heading will appear).
30408 These options are described in detail in the
30413 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30423 \begin_layout Standard
30424 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30425 \begin_inset space ~
30429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30431 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30442 Bibliography Processors
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30446 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30447 uses a bibliography processor,
30448 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30449 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30450 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30452 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30453 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30456 \begin_layout Standard
30457 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30459 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30460 You can do this on a general level in
30462 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30463 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30464 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30467 or for individual documents in
30469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30474 The following variants are available by default:
30477 \begin_layout Description
30478 biber a specific, modern processor
30479 \begin_inset Index idx
30482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30489 developed exclusively for
30493 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30499 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30504 makes use of; if you use the
30508 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30515 \begin_layout Description
30516 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30517 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30518 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30522 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30525 \begin_layout Description
30526 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30527 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30531 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30535 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30539 features are supported.
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 By default (with the
30549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30550 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30563 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30564 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30565 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30568 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30569 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30582 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30583 -based bibliography styles).
30584 This should suit most needs.
30587 \begin_layout Standard
30588 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30589 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30590 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30595 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30596 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30597 You can adjust it in
30599 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30600 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30601 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30607 \begin_layout Standard
30608 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30609 can add below the selection.
30610 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30611 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30617 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30633 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30635 These are explained in detail in section
30637 Customizing Bibliographies
30641 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30646 Additional Features
30651 \begin_layout Subsection
30653 \begin_inset Index idx
30656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30657 Bibliography ! Citation format
30663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30665 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30672 \begin_layout Standard
30673 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30678 \begin_inset space \space{}
30681 numerical citation (as
30682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30689 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30697 ) or author-year citations (as
30698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30707 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30711 \begin_layout Standard
30712 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30720 \begin_inset Index idx
30723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30724 Document ! Settings
30729 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30735 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30736 labels, is there to use
30739 \begin_inset space ~
30750 \begin_inset space ~
30755 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30758 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30765 \begin_layout Standard
30766 With a bibliography database (see
30767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30769 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30776 ) one has in contrary to the
30780 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30781 These style formats are available:
30784 \begin_layout Description
30786 \begin_inset space ~
30789 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30790 -based approached without any additional packages
30791 (simple numeric citations).
30794 \begin_layout Description
30795 Biblatex loads the package
30800 \begin_inset Index idx
30803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30805 packages ! biblatex
30810 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30812 Biblatex citation style
30816 Biblatex bibliography style
30819 Options to the package
30823 can be entered in the
30830 \begin_layout Description
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30836 \begin_inset space ~
30839 mode) loads the package
30843 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30844 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30856 behavior very closely.
30861 this option has some additional styles.
30866 styles are also supported by this variant.
30869 \begin_layout Description
30871 \begin_inset space ~
30874 (BibTeX) loads the package
30879 \begin_inset Index idx
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30889 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30892 \begin_layout Description
30894 \begin_inset space ~
30897 (BibTeX) loads the package
30902 \begin_inset Index idx
30905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30924 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30926 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30935 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30937 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30938 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30940 Biblatex citation style
30943 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30949 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30953 \begin_layout Standard
30954 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30955 are available in the
30960 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30961 a name prefix such as
30962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30977 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30982 \begin_inset space \space{}
30986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30997 \begin_layout Standard
30998 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31004 \begin_inset space \space{}
31007 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31013 \begin_inset space \space{}
31017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31029 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31033 \begin_inset space ~
31041 \begin_inset space ~
31047 Here is a simple example where the text
31048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31059 appears after the reference:
31062 \begin_layout Quote
31064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31067 key "latexcompanion"
31075 \begin_layout Standard
31076 All styles except for
31080 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31090 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31094 \begin_layout Standard
31095 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31096 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31097 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31102 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31103 multi-citation (so-called
31104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31107 qualified citation lists
31108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31114 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31119 dialog will display three columns in the field
31126 \begin_inset space ~
31134 \begin_inset space ~
31142 \begin_inset space ~
31148 If you double-click on an item's
31151 \begin_inset space ~
31159 \begin_inset space ~
31164 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31167 General text before
31173 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31176 \begin_layout Section
31178 \begin_inset Index idx
31181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31197 \begin_layout Standard
31198 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31202 \begin_inset space ~
31207 or the toolbar button
31214 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31215 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31216 by \SpecialChar LyX
31217 as the index entry.
31220 \begin_layout Standard
31221 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31224 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31226 \begin_inset space ~
31232 A light blue box labeled
31233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31244 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31245 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31249 \begin_layout Standard
31250 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31251 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31252 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31253 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31257 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31265 \begin_layout Subsection
31266 Grouping Index Entries
31267 \begin_inset Index idx
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31279 \begin_layout Standard
31280 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31282 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31283 lists under the entry
31284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31292 First we create the entry
31293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31301 \begin_inset space ~
31305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31307 reference "subsec:Lists"
31312 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31313 \begin_inset space ~
31317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31319 reference "sec:Itemize"
31323 , we insert the command
31326 \begin_layout Standard
31332 \begin_layout Standard
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31342 \begin_layout Standard
31343 for the enumerated list in section
31344 \begin_inset space ~
31348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31350 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31358 The exclamation mark
31359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31366 marks the grouping levels.
31367 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31368 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31369 If we don't have an index entry for
31370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31377 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31380 \begin_layout Subsection
31382 \begin_inset Index idx
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31386 Index ! Page ranges
31394 \begin_layout Standard
31395 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31397 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31398 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31399 an index entry in section
31400 \begin_inset space ~
31404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31406 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31416 Paragraph environments|(
31419 \begin_layout Standard
31420 and another entry at the end of section
31421 \begin_inset space ~
31425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31427 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31437 Paragraph environments|)
31440 \begin_layout Standard
31442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31465 respectively start and end the index range.
31466 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31467 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31468 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31469 An example is the index entry
31470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31473 Document ! Settings
31474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31480 \begin_layout Subsection
31482 \begin_inset Index idx
31485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31486 Index ! Cross referencing
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31496 We referred for example in the index entry
31497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31505 \begin_inset space ~
31509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31511 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31515 ) to the index entry
31516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31523 in the same section using the entry
31526 \begin_layout Standard
31529 GIF|see{Image formats}
31532 \begin_layout Standard
31533 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31535 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31536 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31539 \begin_layout Subsection
31541 \begin_inset Index idx
31544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31545 Index ! Entry order
31553 \begin_layout Standard
31554 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31555 follow the rules for the index order.
31556 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31562 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31564 \begin_inset space ~
31568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31570 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31579 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31580 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31605 \begin_inset Index idx
31608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31609 Dummy entries ! maïs
31615 \begin_inset Index idx
31618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31619 Dummy entries ! maître
31625 \begin_inset Index idx
31628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31629 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31634 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31635 maïs, maison, maître.
31636 To achieve this, we use the command
31639 \begin_layout Standard
31642 previous entry@current entry
31645 \begin_layout Standard
31646 In our case we want to have
31647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31662 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31665 \begin_layout Standard
31671 \begin_layout Standard
31672 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31673 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31675 See the next subsection for an example.
31678 \begin_layout Subsection
31680 \begin_inset Index idx
31683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31684 Index ! Entry layout
31692 \begin_layout Standard
31693 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31694 \begin_inset Index idx
31697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31700 This is an italic dummy entry
31705 You can also format the page number using the character
31706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31713 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31714 -command without a backslash.
31715 We can write for example
31718 \begin_layout Standard
31721 italic page number:|textit
31724 \begin_layout Standard
31725 to get the page number in italic.
31726 \begin_inset Index idx
31729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31730 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31735 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31736 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31754 \begin_inset space ~
31760 Have a look at section
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31767 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31771 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31784 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31788 to generate the index, see section
31789 \begin_inset space ~
31793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31795 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31804 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31809 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31813 key "latexcompanion"
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31827 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31829 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31830 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31831 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31832 If so, put the following in the preamble
31835 \begin_layout Standard
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31851 \begin_layout Standard
31857 \begin_layout Standard
31858 in the index entry.
31859 \begin_inset Index idx
31862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31863 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31868 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31869 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31870 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31873 \begin_layout Standard
31874 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31875 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31876 a bold font for all index entries.
31877 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31889 documentation for details,
31890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31892 key "makeindex,xindy"
31900 \begin_layout Subsection
31902 \begin_inset Index idx
31905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31914 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31921 \begin_layout Standard
31922 If the index generation program
31926 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31927 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31931 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31932 distribution, is used.
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31941 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31942 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31943 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31944 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31945 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31955 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31957 dialog, see section
31958 \begin_inset space ~
31962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31964 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31969 The available options are listed and explained in
31970 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31972 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31978 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31982 \begin_layout Standard
31983 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31984 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31992 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31993 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31996 \begin_layout Subsection
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32001 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32002 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32010 next to the standard index.
32012 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32013 that add this feature.
32020 \begin_inset Index idx
32023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32025 packages ! splitidx
32030 package to generate multiple indexes.
32031 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32037 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32047 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32048 style, but it also includes
32049 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32050 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32058 \begin_layout Standard
32059 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32060 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32063 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32066 and select the option
32068 Use multiple Indexes
32075 already contains the standard index
32076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32084 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32085 also appear as a heading) to the
32089 input field and press the
32094 The new index now also appears in the list.
32095 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32096 label color to the new index.
32099 \begin_layout Standard
32100 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32110 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32111 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32112 are additional features:
32115 \begin_layout Itemize
32116 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32117 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32120 \begin_layout Itemize
32121 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32122 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32127 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32128 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32129 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32130 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32133 \begin_layout Itemize
32138 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32139 code in the name of the index.
32142 \begin_layout Section
32143 Nomenclature/Glossary
32144 \begin_inset Index idx
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32154 \begin_inset Index idx
32157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32188 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32197 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32198 called nomenclature or glossary.
32201 \begin_layout Standard
32202 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32209 \begin_inset Index idx
32212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32220 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32222 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32229 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32233 \begin_layout Standard
32234 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32235 and then use the menu
32237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32243 \begin_inset space ~
32248 or the toolbar button
32251 arg "nomencl-insert"
32256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32267 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32270 \begin_layout Standard
32271 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32272 The first is the term or
32276 that you wish to define.
32281 of the term or symbol.
32284 \begin_layout Standard
32285 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32293 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32294 code for nomenclature entries the option
32298 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32306 \begin_layout Subsection
32307 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32308 \begin_inset Index idx
32311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32312 Nomenclature ! Layout
32320 \begin_layout Standard
32321 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32325 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32332 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32340 \begin_inset Newline newline
32348 \begin_inset Newline newline
32354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32361 character starts/ends the formula.
32362 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32363 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32375 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32385 \begin_layout Standard
32386 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32387 syntax is given in section
32388 \begin_inset space ~
32392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32394 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32405 \begin_inset space ~
32410 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32412 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32417 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32424 in this document is:
32425 \begin_inset Newline newline
32430 dummy entry for the character
32435 \begin_inset Newline newline
32447 \begin_inset space ~
32457 font use the command
32486 \begin_layout Standard
32487 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32492 \begin_inset space \space{}
32496 \begin_inset Newline newline
32512 \begin_inset Newline newline
32515 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32516 This command will make the font of all symbols
32523 \begin_inset space ~
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 If the characters |
32533 \begin_inset space \space{}
32537 \begin_inset space \space{}
32541 \begin_inset space \space{}
32545 \begin_inset space \space{}
32549 \begin_inset space \space{}
32552 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32553 code they need to be escaped
32554 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32555 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32556 LatexCommand nomenclature
32557 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32558 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32566 \begin_layout Subsection
32567 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32568 \begin_inset Index idx
32571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32572 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32580 \begin_layout Standard
32581 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32582 -code of the symbol
32584 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32586 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32590 LatexCommand nomenclature
32592 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32600 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32604 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32605 LatexCommand nomenclature
32608 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32614 They will be sorted by
32615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32641 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32644 will be sorted before the
32648 since the character
32649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32656 is considered in sorting.
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32660 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32663 \begin_inset space ~
32668 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32669 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32671 For the example given, you can insert
32675 in this field for the
32676 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32683 will be located before
32684 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32690 \begin_layout Standard
32691 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32706 \begin_layout Subsection
32707 Nomenclature Options
32708 \begin_inset Index idx
32711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32712 Nomenclature ! Options
32718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32720 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32727 \begin_layout Standard
32732 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32733 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32736 \begin_layout Description
32737 refeq Appends the phrase
32738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32753 to every nomenclature entry, where
32759 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32762 \begin_layout Description
32763 refpage Appends the phrase
32764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32779 to every nomenclature entry, where
32785 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32788 \begin_layout Description
32789 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32793 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32794 class options list in the
32796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32800 In this document the options
32807 \begin_layout Standard
32808 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32814 \begin_layout Standard
32815 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32816 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32821 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32824 \begin_layout Description
32834 \begin_layout Description
32837 nomrefpage Like the
32844 \begin_layout Description
32847 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32856 \begin_layout Description
32860 \begin_inset space ~
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32871 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32874 \begin_layout Standard
32876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32883 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32884 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32888 \begin_layout Standard
32897 \begin_inset Newline newline
32903 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32907 \begin_inset space ~
32919 unskip, see equation
32922 \begin_inset Newline newline
32929 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32930 \begin_inset Newline newline
32936 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32940 \begin_inset space ~
32957 \begin_layout Standard
32958 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32966 in the document settings under
32969 \begin_inset space ~
32977 \begin_layout Standard
32985 \begin_inset Newline newline
32989 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32993 \begin_inset space ~
33005 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33007 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33008 \begin_inset Newline newline
33015 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33016 \begin_inset Newline newline
33020 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33036 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33041 \begin_layout Subsection
33042 Printing the Nomenclature
33043 \begin_inset Index idx
33046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33047 Nomenclature ! Printing
33055 \begin_layout Standard
33056 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33059 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33075 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33076 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33077 You can choose between these settings:
33080 \begin_layout Description
33081 Default a space of 1
33082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33088 \begin_layout Description
33090 \begin_inset space ~
33094 \begin_inset space ~
33097 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33100 \begin_layout Description
33101 Custom custom space
33104 \begin_layout Standard
33105 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33114 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33122 For example, in order to change the name to
33126 , add the following line to the preamble:
33129 \begin_layout Standard
33142 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33145 \begin_layout Standard
33146 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33147 \begin_inset Newline newline
33162 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33165 \begin_layout Subsection
33166 Nomenclature Program
33167 \begin_inset Index idx
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 Nomenclature ! Program
33177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33179 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33192 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33193 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33195 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33200 by adding options, see section
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33207 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33212 The available options are listed and explained in
33213 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33215 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33223 \begin_layout Section
33225 \begin_inset Index idx
33228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33235 \begin_inset Index idx
33238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33239 Document ! Branches
33245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33247 name "sec:Branches"
33254 \begin_layout Standard
33255 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33256 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33257 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33258 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33261 \begin_layout Standard
33262 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33263 allows you to put text into branches.
33264 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33265 To create a branch, either select the menu
33267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33268 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33271 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33280 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33281 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33282 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33283 and whether the name of the branch should
33284 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33285 (see below for an example).
33286 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33287 to the name of the other) and to add
33288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33303 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33304 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33307 \begin_layout Standard
33308 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33309 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33314 where you can choose a branch.
33315 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33319 \begin_layout Standard
33320 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33321 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33325 \begin_inset Branch Question
33329 \begin_layout Standard
33334 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33342 \begin_layout Standard
33343 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33347 \begin_layout Standard
33352 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33360 \begin_layout Standard
33367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33368 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33371 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33372 Consider for example a file
33373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33380 which has the above branches.
33382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33389 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33413 branch were inactive,
33414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33429 branch was active, likewise
33430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33445 branch was active, and
33446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33449 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33453 if both branches were active.
33454 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33455 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33468 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33469 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33481 \begin_layout Standard
33482 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33486 \begin_layout Standard
33492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33499 branch is deactivated.
33505 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33511 \begin_layout Standard
33512 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33513 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33514 definitions for each branch.
33515 For example you can define for the question branch
33519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33520 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33521 -syntax, see section
33522 \begin_inset space ~
33526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33528 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33540 \begin_layout Standard
33550 \begin_layout Standard
33560 \begin_layout Standard
33561 and for the answer branch
33564 \begin_layout Standard
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33584 \begin_layout Standard
33585 \begin_inset Branch Question
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33621 \begin_layout Standard
33622 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33626 \begin_layout Standard
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33658 \begin_layout Standard
33659 Now it is possible to use the
33663 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33670 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33673 commands to obtain conditional output.
33674 Here is an example formula where only the
33681 \begin_inset Formula
33683 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33691 \begin_layout Standard
33692 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33700 \begin_layout Standard
33701 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33707 \begin_inset space \space{}
33710 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33712 For this advanced usage, see the
33718 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33723 \begin_layout Section
33725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33727 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33732 \begin_inset Index idx
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33744 \begin_layout Standard
33747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33751 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33753 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33759 \begin_inset Index idx
33762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33764 packages ! hyperref
33769 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33770 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33771 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33772 part of the document.
33776 \begin_layout Standard
33777 The header information in the dialog tab
33781 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33782 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33783 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33784 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33797 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33798 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33799 and author entries.
33803 \begin_inset space ~
33807 \begin_inset space ~
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33816 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33819 \begin_layout Standard
33820 You can specify in the dialog tab
33824 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33829 \begin_inset space ~
33833 \begin_inset space ~
33837 \begin_inset space ~
33842 option allows long links to be split;
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33849 \begin_inset space ~
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33861 \begin_inset space ~
33866 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33874 colors the different links.
33875 The default colors are:
33878 \begin_layout Labeling
33879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33884 for hyperlinks and URLs
33887 \begin_layout Labeling
33888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33896 \begin_layout Labeling
33897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33905 \begin_layout Standard
33906 but you can change these in the field
33911 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33917 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33920 \begin_layout Standard
33925 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33926 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33927 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33930 \begin_layout Standard
33935 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33936 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33937 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33947 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33948 when opening the PDF.
33950 \begin_inset space ~
33953 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33954 \begin_inset space ~
33957 1 will only display the sections.
33960 \begin_layout Standard
33961 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33962 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33968 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33979 \begin_layout Section
33981 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33985 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33992 \begin_layout Subsection
33995 \begin_inset Index idx
33998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34008 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 As \SpecialChar LyX
34017 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34018 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34019 commands and constructs,
34022 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34023 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34024 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34025 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34026 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34027 cannot support all packages and
34031 \begin_layout Standard
34032 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34033 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34034 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34038 Code box is created by the menu
34040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34042 \begin_inset space ~
34047 or by the toolbar button
34060 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34068 \begin_layout Standard
34069 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34071 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34073 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34078 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34083 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34090 , you can write the command part
34096 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34097 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34101 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34102 Code box behind the word.
34103 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34104 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34109 \begin_inset Graphics
34110 filename clipart/ERT.png
34118 \begin_layout Standard
34122 \begin_layout Standard
34123 This is a line with a
34127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34160 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34161 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34162 know that the command is finished.
34170 \begin_layout Subsection
34171 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34173 \begin_inset Argument 1
34176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34177 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34184 \begin_inset Index idx
34187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34197 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34204 \begin_layout Standard
34205 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34206 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34207 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34208 uses in the background.
34209 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34210 is based on commands, you can
34211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34219 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34220 any time if you know the right commands.
34221 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34222 is the end of the day.
34223 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34224 all caption labels bold.
34225 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34227 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34231 \begin_layout Standard
34232 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34234 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34236 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34239 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34249 \begin_layout Standard
34250 As result you find that the package
34255 \begin_inset Index idx
34258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34266 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34271 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34275 \begin_inset space ~
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34288 usepackage[options]{package name}
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34293 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34294 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34295 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 In your case the package name is
34304 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34309 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34310 So you add the command
34313 \begin_layout Standard
34318 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34321 \begin_layout Standard
34322 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34327 For more commands provided by the
34331 package, have a look at its documentation,
34332 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34347 \begin_layout Standard
34348 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34350 For example if you use a
34354 class, you don't need the package
34358 , you can instead write
34361 \begin_layout Standard
34366 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34371 \begin_layout Standard
34372 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34373 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34374 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34381 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34386 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34388 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34389 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34390 Code box as described in the previous
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34396 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34401 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34409 \begin_layout Standard
34410 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34430 \begin_inset Note Note
34433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34434 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34442 \begin_layout Left Header
34443 \begin_inset Argument 1
34446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34466 \begin_inset Note Note
34469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34470 defines the header line as described below
34478 \begin_layout Center Header
34479 \begin_inset Argument 1
34482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34491 \begin_layout Right Header
34492 \begin_inset Argument 1
34495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34516 \begin_layout Left Footer
34517 \begin_inset Argument 1
34520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34541 \begin_layout Center Footer
34542 \begin_inset Argument 1
34545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34557 \begin_inset Newline newline
34561 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34567 \begin_layout Right Footer
34568 \begin_inset Argument 1
34571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34593 \begin_layout Section
34594 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34597 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34602 \begin_inset Index idx
34605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34606 Document ! Header/Footer line
34612 \begin_inset Index idx
34615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 \begin_layout Standard
34625 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34646 \begin_inset space ~
34652 As a second step add in the menu
34654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34655 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34664 Custom Header/Footerlines
34667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34671 This module offers the following 6
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34678 \begin_layout Description
34680 \begin_inset space ~
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_inset space ~
34696 \begin_inset space ~
34702 \begin_layout Description
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34712 \begin_inset space ~
34716 \begin_inset space ~
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34727 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34728 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34731 \begin_layout Standard
34732 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34733 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34741 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34745 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34748 \begin_layout Standard
34749 \begin_inset Float figure
34756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34759 \begin_inset Tabular
34760 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34761 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34762 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34763 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34764 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34784 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34813 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 The normal text on the page goes here.
34829 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34831 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34832 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34837 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34846 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34875 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34904 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34922 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34927 name "fig:Page-layout"
34931 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34944 \begin_layout Standard
34945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34953 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34957 \begin_inset space ~
34962 is set to “Default”.
34963 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34972 \begin_layout Subsection
34976 \begin_layout Standard
34977 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34978 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34979 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34980 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34982 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34984 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34987 \begin_layout Standard
34988 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34989 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34995 \begin_inset space ~
35003 \begin_layout Description
35006 thepage prints the current page number
35009 \begin_layout Description
35012 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35015 \begin_layout Description
35018 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35021 \begin_layout Description
35024 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35025 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35032 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35035 because it usually goes in a left header.
35038 \begin_layout Description
35041 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35042 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35044 It is normally used in the right header.
35047 \begin_layout Subsection
35048 Default header/footer
35051 \begin_layout Standard
35052 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35053 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35054 footer has the page number.
35055 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35056 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35057 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35068 \begin_layout Subsection
35072 \begin_layout Standard
35073 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35074 Some pages are different.
35075 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35076 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35077 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35078 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35079 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35082 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35083 Header and footer decoration line
35086 \begin_layout Standard
35087 By default, you get a 0.4
35088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35091 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35092 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35104 in the following way:
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35114 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35131 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35139 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35141 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35142 \begin_inset space ~
35146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35157 Several header/footer lines
35160 \begin_layout Standard
35161 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35162 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35163 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35165 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35181 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35191 \begin_layout Standard
35198 headheight}{height}
35201 \begin_layout Standard
35206 is a size in standard units (e.
35207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35211 \begin_inset space \space{}
35219 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35220 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35221 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35222 logfile with the menu
35224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35239 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35244 \begin_inset Index idx
35247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35249 packages ! fancyhdr
35255 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35256 for your header/footer.
35259 \begin_layout Subsection
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35265 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35266 This example consists of the following definition:
35269 \begin_layout Description
35271 \begin_inset space ~
35280 , empty optional argument
35283 \begin_layout Description
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35288 Header empty, empty optional argument
35291 \begin_layout Description
35293 \begin_inset space ~
35302 in the optional argument
35305 \begin_layout Description
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35316 in the optional argument
35319 \begin_layout Description
35321 \begin_inset space ~
35334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35338 \begin_inset Newline newline
35342 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35349 in the optional argument
35352 \begin_layout Description
35354 \begin_inset space ~
35363 , empty optional argument
35366 \begin_layout Description
35369 headrulewidth set to 2
35370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35376 \begin_layout Standard
35377 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35378 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35384 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35394 \begin_layout Standard
35395 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35409 pagestyle{headings}
35415 \begin_inset Note Note
35418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35419 switches back to page style with the default headings
35427 \begin_layout Section
35428 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35431 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35436 \begin_inset Index idx
35439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35446 \begin_inset Index idx
35449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35458 \begin_layout Standard
35460 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35461 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35462 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35465 \begin_layout Subsection
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35476 \begin_inset Index idx
35479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 packages ! preview-latex
35486 (on some systems named simply
35491 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35493 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35500 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35502 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35510 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35511 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35512 -package are automatically
35513 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35517 \begin_layout Subsection
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35522 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35523 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35525 activate the option
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35535 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35541 \begin_inset space ~
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35548 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35555 \begin_inset space ~
35568 \begin_inset space ~
35573 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35576 \begin_layout Standard
35577 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35582 \begin_inset space ~
35590 \begin_inset space ~
35598 \begin_layout Standard
35599 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35600 and when you finish
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35613 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35614 generated by activating the option
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35623 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35631 \begin_layout Subsection
35632 Selected document parts
35635 \begin_layout Standard
35636 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35637 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35638 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35639 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35641 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35643 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35647 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35648 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35649 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35653 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35660 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35672 is explained in section
35674 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35679 \begin_inset space ~
35689 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35690 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35691 the final rotated boxes,
35692 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35693 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35695 Here is the result:
35698 \begin_layout Standard
35699 \begin_inset Preview
35701 \begin_layout Standard
35706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35710 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35716 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35726 height_special "totalheight"
35731 backgroundcolor "none"
35734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35759 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35765 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35787 \begin_layout Standard
35788 Previewing works also for colors.
35789 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35808 is explained in section
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35829 \begin_inset Preview
35831 \begin_layout Standard
35835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35854 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35859 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35878 \begin_layout Standard
35879 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35885 \begin_layout Standard
35886 If \SpecialChar LyX
35887 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35888 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35889 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35890 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35891 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35892 the \SpecialChar TeX
35894 If \SpecialChar LyX
35895 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35896 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35898 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35899 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35900 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35903 \begin_layout Subsection
35908 \begin_layout Standard
35909 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35910 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35913 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35920 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35922 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35924 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35925 's main window, then only this selection
35926 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35927 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35928 the source view window.
35933 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35934 ; but note that if you have
35935 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35937 not just the one which is open at the time.
35940 \begin_layout Section
35941 Advanced Find and Replace
35942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35944 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35949 \begin_inset Index idx
35952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35959 \begin_inset Index idx
35962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35971 \begin_layout Subsection
35975 \begin_layout Standard
35976 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35977 allows for searching of complex,
35978 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35980 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35981 The key-features are:
35984 \begin_layout Itemize
35985 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35986 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35987 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35991 \begin_layout Itemize
35992 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35993 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35994 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35995 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35998 \begin_layout Itemize
35999 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36000 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36001 outside of mathematics environments
36004 \begin_layout Itemize
36005 Search may be widened to a specific
36010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36014 \begin_inset space ~
36017 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36018 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36025 \begin_layout Itemize
36026 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36027 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36032 \begin_inset space ~
36035 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36038 \begin_layout Subsection
36042 \begin_layout Standard
36043 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36045 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36058 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36061 ) or the toolbar button
36064 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36070 Advanced Find and Replace
36075 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36079 \begin_layout Standard
36085 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36094 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36097 arg "paragraph-break"
36101 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36102 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36106 arg "paragraph-break"
36109 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36113 searches backwards.
36116 \begin_layout Standard
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36125 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36134 \begin_inset space ~
36139 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36142 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36143 Searching for mathematics
36146 \begin_layout Standard
36147 Mathematical formulas, such as
36148 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36151 or something more complex like
36152 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36155 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36160 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36161 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36162 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36163 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36173 \begin_layout Standard
36174 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36175 This is done by switching to the
36179 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36184 This way, entering in the
36191 \begin_layout Itemize
36192 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36193 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36196 \begin_layout Itemize
36197 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36198 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36201 \begin_layout Itemize
36202 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36203 of it only within section headings.
36204 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36205 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36209 \begin_layout Itemize
36210 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36211 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36218 \begin_layout Standard
36219 The entries made in the
36223 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36232 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36236 button or alternatively press
36239 arg "paragraph-break"
36246 while the cursor is in the
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_layout Standard
36258 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36260 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36264 \begin_layout Itemize
36265 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36266 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36274 with its typewriter version
36275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36289 \begin_layout Itemize
36290 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36296 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36308 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36315 (you may want to enable the
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36326 \begin_inset space ~
36331 options and disable the
36339 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36347 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36348 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36352 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36355 , or occurrences of
36356 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36360 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36366 \begin_layout Subsection
36370 \begin_layout Standard
36371 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36376 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36380 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36390 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36396 This is done with the context menu
36398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36399 Insert Regular Expression
36401 while the cursor is in the
36406 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36407 expression matching rules
36411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36412 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36422 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36423 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36429 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36430 same text in the document.
36431 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36432 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36435 \begin_layout Enumerate
36436 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36441 editor the fraction
36442 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36446 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36449 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36450 fractions with the given denominator.
36453 \begin_layout Enumerate
36454 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36466 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36471 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36472 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36473 Also, by inserting a
36474 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36477 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36478 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36481 \begin_layout Standard
36482 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36483 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36484 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36487 , and referring back to them through
36488 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36492 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36496 For example, try searching with the regexp
36497 \begin_inset Newline newline
36500 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36503 \begin_inset Newline newline
36506 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36509 \begin_layout Standard
36510 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36513 \begin_layout Standard
36514 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36522 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36523 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36524 sub-expressions is absolute.
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36533 always refers to the first occurrence of
36534 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36537 in all entered regexps.
36545 \begin_layout Section
36547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36549 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36554 \begin_inset Index idx
36557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36566 \begin_layout Standard
36568 has a built-in spell checker.
36571 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36578 key or the toolbar button
36581 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36584 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36585 beginning of the currently selected text.
36586 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36587 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36588 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36589 scrolled so that it is visible.
36590 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36591 n, if any could be found.
36592 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36596 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36597 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36600 \begin_layout Standard
36601 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36608 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36609 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36611 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36612 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36623 arg "dialog-show character"
36626 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36628 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36631 \begin_layout Standard
36632 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36633 can be downloaded from here:
36634 \begin_inset Newline newline
36638 \begin_inset Flex URL
36641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36643 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36649 \begin_inset Newline newline
36653 \begin_inset space ~
36656 files for each language.
36657 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36661 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36662 's installation subfolder
36670 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36672 \begin_inset Newline newline
36675 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36676 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36677 but in most cases these are
36693 is the language code.
36696 \begin_layout Subsection
36700 \begin_layout Standard
36703 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36704 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36709 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36712 you can set the following things:
36715 \begin_layout Description
36717 \begin_inset space ~
36720 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36721 should use for spell checking.
36722 Depending on your platform,
36732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36733 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36734 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36749 \begin_inset space ~
36752 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36755 \begin_layout Description
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36760 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36761 will always use the given language
36762 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36765 \begin_layout Description
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36770 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36776 \begin_inset space \space{}
36780 This should normally not be needed.
36783 \begin_layout Description
36785 \begin_inset space ~
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36792 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36804 \begin_layout Description
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36809 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36810 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36811 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36812 appear in a context menu.
36813 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36817 \begin_layout Description
36819 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36830 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36834 \begin_layout Section
36836 \begin_inset Index idx
36839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36848 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36857 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36858 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36868 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36870 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36880 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36882 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36883 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36884 which are available for many languages.
36887 \begin_layout Standard
36888 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36889 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36893 \begin_layout Subsection
36894 Setting up the thesaurus
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36906 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36910 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36915 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36921 \begin_inset space ~
36929 For instance, the US English files are named:
36932 \begin_layout Itemize
36936 \begin_layout Itemize
36940 \begin_layout Standard
36949 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36950 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36953 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36954 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36955 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36957 \begin_inset space ~
36962 ) to the path where they are installed.
36966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36967 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36968 ies, typical locations are
36974 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36978 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36982 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36985 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36991 LibreOffice-<Version>
36998 On the Mac, the default location is
37000 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37001 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37002 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37003 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37004 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37005 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37013 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37014 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37015 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37019 \begin_layout Standard
37020 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37021 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37023 \begin_inset Newline newline
37027 \begin_inset Flex URL
37030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37042 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37044 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37045 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37046 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37048 \begin_inset space ~
37053 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37055 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37056 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37060 \begin_layout Standard
37061 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37063 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37066 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37072 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37075 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37076 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37085 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37086 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37093 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37096 \begin_layout Subsection
37097 Using the thesaurus
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37101 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37103 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37106 or the toolbar button
37109 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37112 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37114 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37116 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37117 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37118 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37127 ), related terms (such as
37130 \begin_inset space ~
37139 ), compounds (such as
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37151 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37160 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37163 \begin_layout Standard
37164 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37165 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37171 the dictionary, such as the above
37175 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37180 \begin_inset space \space{}
37183 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37184 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37185 For example, looking up the word form
37189 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37194 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37199 \begin_inset space \space{}
37210 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37211 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37212 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37215 \begin_layout Section
37217 \begin_inset Index idx
37220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37227 \begin_inset Index idx
37230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37231 Document ! Change Tracking
37237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37239 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37247 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37248 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37249 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37250 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37257 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37267 \begin_layout Standard
37268 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37282 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37283 You can change the color in
37285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37286 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37297 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37303 \begin_inset Index idx
37306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37307 Color ! Change tracking
37312 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37313 's status bar when the
37314 cursor is in changed text.
37315 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37318 arg "changes-merge"
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37325 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37327 \begin_inset Index idx
37330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37339 \begin_layout Standard
37340 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37346 \begin_layout Standard
37347 \begin_inset Graphics
37348 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37356 \begin_layout Standard
37357 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37364 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37367 \begin_layout Standard
37368 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37374 \begin_layout Standard
37375 \begin_inset Tabular
37376 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37377 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37378 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37379 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37389 arg "changes-track"
37397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37408 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37428 arg "changes-output"
37436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37447 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37449 \begin_inset space ~
37453 \begin_inset space ~
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37487 Jumps to the next change
37493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37502 arg "change-accept"
37510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37521 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37541 arg "change-reject"
37549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37557 \begin_inset space ~
37560 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37580 arg "changes-merge"
37588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37596 \begin_inset space ~
37599 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37619 arg "all-changes-accept"
37627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37638 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37653 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37662 arg "all-changes-reject"
37670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37676 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37681 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37720 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37722 \begin_inset space ~
37731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37754 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37800 \begin_layout Standard
37801 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37802 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37803 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37804 the next change after the current cursor position.
37805 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37806 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37807 step to the next change.
37808 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37811 \begin_layout Standard
37812 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37813 to describe a change.
37816 \begin_layout Standard
37817 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37823 \begin_inset Index idx
37826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37834 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37843 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37847 \begin_layout Section
37848 Comparison of Documents
37849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37851 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37856 \begin_inset Index idx
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37860 Comparison of documents
37868 \begin_layout Standard
37869 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37876 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37877 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37879 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37881 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37885 \begin_inset space ~
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37893 \begin_inset space ~
37902 \begin_inset space ~
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37910 \begin_inset space ~
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37918 \begin_inset space ~
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37927 enables the change tracking option
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37943 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37946 \begin_layout Section
37947 International Support
37948 \begin_inset Index idx
37951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 International support
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37962 with any language you want.
37963 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37964 up \SpecialChar LyX
37966 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37968 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37977 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37978 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37979 \begin_inset space ~
37983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37985 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37992 \begin_layout Subsection
37994 \begin_inset Index idx
37997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38004 \begin_inset Index idx
38007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 Document ! Settings
38014 \begin_inset Index idx
38017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38018 Document ! Language
38026 \begin_layout Standard
38029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38030 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38033 dialog lets you set
38035 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38040 \begin_layout Standard
38045 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38050 \begin_inset space ~
38055 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38056 For details about the different encoding options see section
38057 \begin_inset space ~
38061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38063 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38070 \begin_layout Subsection
38071 Keyboard mapping configuration
38072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38074 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38082 If you have for example a U.
38083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38086 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38087 can use an alternate keymap.
38088 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38093 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38094 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38095 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38098 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38099 \begin_inset space ~
38103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38105 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38110 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38111 which one you want to use.
38114 \begin_layout Standard
38115 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38116 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38117 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38121 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38122 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38123 one to support the characters you want.
38124 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38131 \begin_layout Chapter
38134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38136 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38143 \begin_layout Standard
38144 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38145 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38146 topic inside the user's guide.
38149 \begin_layout Section
38151 \begin_inset Index idx
38154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38163 \begin_layout Standard
38168 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38171 \begin_layout Subsection
38175 \begin_layout Standard
38176 Creates a new document.
38179 \begin_layout Subsection
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38185 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38186 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38189 \begin_layout Subsection
38193 \begin_layout Standard
38197 \begin_layout Subsection
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38203 Click there on a file to open it.
38206 \begin_layout Subsection
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 Closes the current document.
38214 \begin_layout Subsection
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 Closes all opened documents.
38222 \begin_layout Subsection
38226 \begin_layout Standard
38227 Saves the actual document.
38230 \begin_layout Subsection
38234 \begin_layout Standard
38235 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38238 \begin_layout Subsection
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 Saves all opened documents.
38246 \begin_layout Subsection
38250 \begin_layout Standard
38251 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38254 \begin_layout Subsection
38258 \begin_layout Standard
38259 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38260 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38261 It is described in the section
38263 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38268 Additional Features
38273 \begin_layout Subsection
38277 \begin_layout Standard
38278 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38279 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38281 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38282 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38286 \begin_layout Standard
38287 When using the menu entry
38290 \begin_inset space ~
38295 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38299 \begin_inset space ~
38303 \begin_inset space ~
38307 \begin_inset space ~
38312 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38313 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38316 \begin_layout Subsection
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38320 name "subsec:Export"
38327 \begin_layout Standard
38328 You can export your document to various file formats.
38329 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38331 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38332 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38333 during its configuration.
38336 \begin_layout Standard
38337 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38345 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38352 \begin_layout Description
38358 \begin_inset space ~
38361 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38363 \begin_inset space ~
38366 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38367 \begin_inset Newline newline
38370 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38371 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38375 \begin_layout Description
38376 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38382 \begin_layout Description
38384 \begin_inset space ~
38387 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38393 \begin_layout Description
38394 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38395 's native DVI-format.
38396 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38397 files paths or file names in your document.
38399 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38406 \begin_layout Description
38407 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38408 in files paths or file names
38411 \begin_layout Description
38413 \begin_inset space ~
38420 ) DVI-format using the program
38422 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38425 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38429 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38437 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38445 \begin_layout Description
38447 \begin_inset space ~
38450 (cropped) the same as
38454 but with cropped page margins.
38457 \begin_layout Description
38459 \begin_inset space ~
38462 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38466 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38471 \begin_layout Description
38475 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38483 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38491 \begin_layout Description
38493 \begin_inset space ~
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38500 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38504 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38512 \begin_layout Description
38516 \begin_inset space ~
38525 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38526 source that is compilable with the program
38528 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38532 \begin_layout Description
38536 \begin_inset space ~
38541 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38542 source, additionally all images used in the document
38543 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38547 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38550 \begin_layout Description
38554 \begin_inset space ~
38559 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38560 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38561 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38569 \begin_layout Description
38573 \begin_inset space ~
38582 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38583 source that is compilable with the program
38589 \begin_layout Description
38591 \begin_inset space ~
38595 \begin_inset space ~
38602 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38603 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38609 \begin_layout Description
38611 \begin_inset space ~
38614 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38615 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38621 \begin_inset space \space{}
38626 \begin_inset space ~
38630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38645 represent the version number)
38648 \begin_layout Description
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38654 \begin_inset space ~
38657 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38658 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38659 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38663 \begin_layout Description
38664 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38665 's internal XHTML engine
38668 \begin_layout Description
38670 \begin_inset space ~
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38682 \begin_inset space ~
38685 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38690 For the conversion the program
38699 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38702 \begin_layout Description
38703 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38708 \begin_layout Description
38710 \begin_inset space ~
38713 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38715 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38718 For the conversion the program
38727 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38730 \begin_layout Description
38732 \begin_inset space ~
38735 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38736 For the conversion the program
38745 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38748 \begin_layout Description
38750 \begin_inset space ~
38753 (cropped) the same as
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38761 but with cropped page margins
38764 \begin_layout Description
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38773 PDF-format using the program
38777 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38780 \begin_layout Description
38784 \begin_inset space ~
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38801 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38806 \begin_inset space \space{}
38809 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38813 \begin_layout Description
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38822 PDF-format using the program
38824 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38827 , produces PDF-files directly
38830 \begin_layout Description
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38839 PDF-format using the program
38843 , produces PDF-files directly
38846 \begin_layout Description
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38855 PDF-format using the program
38859 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38862 \begin_layout Description
38866 \begin_inset space ~
38871 PDF-format using the program
38876 , produces PDF-files directly
38879 \begin_layout Description
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38891 \begin_layout Description
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38904 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38905 and then exported as text using the program
38910 \begin_layout Description
38915 PostScript format using the program
38923 options see section
38924 \begin_inset space ~
38928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38930 reference "subsec:General-output"
38937 \begin_layout Description
38938 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38939 source and also code in the statistical programming
38953 it is possible to use
38957 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38961 \begin_layout Standard
38962 If one of the menu entries
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38978 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38980 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38982 \begin_inset space ~
38986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38988 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38993 \begin_inset Index idx
38996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38997 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39006 \begin_layout Subsection
39010 \begin_layout Standard
39011 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39012 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39015 \begin_inset space ~
39019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39021 reference "sec:Paths"
39026 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39035 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39036 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39037 's preferences as described in section
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39044 reference "subsec:Converters"
39051 \begin_layout Subsection
39052 New and Close Window
39055 \begin_layout Standard
39056 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39060 \begin_layout Subsection
39064 \begin_layout Standard
39065 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39068 \begin_layout Section
39070 \begin_inset Index idx
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39082 \begin_layout Subsection
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39087 Described in section
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39094 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39101 \begin_layout Subsection
39102 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39105 \begin_layout Standard
39106 Described in section
39107 \begin_inset space ~
39111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39113 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39120 \begin_layout Subsection
39124 \begin_layout Standard
39125 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39126 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39129 \begin_layout Subsection
39133 \begin_layout Standard
39134 Selects the whole document.
39137 \begin_layout Subsection
39138 Find & Replace (Quick)
39141 \begin_layout Standard
39142 Described in section
39143 \begin_inset space ~
39147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39149 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39156 \begin_layout Subsection
39157 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39160 \begin_layout Standard
39161 Described in section
39162 \begin_inset space ~
39166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39168 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39175 \begin_layout Subsection
39176 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39179 \begin_layout Standard
39180 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39184 \begin_layout Subsection
39186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39192 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39193 Described in section
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39200 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39209 \begin_layout Subsection
39211 \begin_inset Index idx
39214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 Paragraph ! Settings
39223 \begin_layout Standard
39224 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39225 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39229 \begin_layout Standard
39230 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39231 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39238 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39250 \begin_layout Subsection
39252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39258 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39259 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39264 \begin_layout Enumerate
39266 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39267 Customize text properties by means of the
39273 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39276 ; this is described in section
39277 \begin_inset space ~
39281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39283 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39290 \begin_layout Enumerate
39292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39293 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39295 Apply last settings
39298 \begin_layout Enumerate
39300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39301 Change the casing of selected text (
39316 \begin_layout Subsection
39318 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39322 \begin_layout Standard
39324 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39325 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39326 text styles (in the case of this document:
39348 \begin_inset space ~
39352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39354 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39363 \begin_layout Subsection
39364 Table and Rows & Columns
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39369 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39370 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39373 \begin_layout Subsection
39377 \begin_layout Standard
39378 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39379 It will dissolve this inset.
39380 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39384 \begin_layout Subsection
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39389 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39390 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39393 \begin_layout Subsection
39394 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39397 \begin_layout Standard
39398 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39400 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39401 \begin_inset space ~
39405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39407 reference "sec:Nesting"
39412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39414 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39421 \begin_layout Section
39423 \begin_inset Index idx
39426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 \begin_layout Standard
39436 At the bottom of the
39440 menu the opened documents are listed.
39443 \begin_layout Subsection
39444 Open/Close all Insets
39447 \begin_layout Standard
39448 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39451 \begin_layout Subsection
39452 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39455 \begin_layout Standard
39456 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39459 \begin_layout Standard
39460 Math macros are described in the
39467 \begin_layout Subsection
39471 \begin_layout Standard
39472 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39473 \begin_inset space ~
39477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39479 reference "sec:Navigating"
39484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39486 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39493 \begin_layout Subsection
39497 \begin_layout Standard
39498 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39500 \begin_inset space ~
39504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39506 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39513 \begin_layout Subsection
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39518 Opens a window showing console messages.
39519 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39524 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39525 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39526 is processing the document.
39529 \begin_layout Subsection
39531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39533 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39538 \begin_inset Index idx
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39550 \begin_layout Standard
39551 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39553 All toolbars and the
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39561 can be turned on and off.
39566 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39590 \begin_inset space ~
39595 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39599 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39606 \begin_layout Standard
39611 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39615 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39616 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39617 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39618 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39619 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39622 \begin_layout Standard
39624 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39631 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39638 \begin_layout Subsection
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39654 \begin_inset space ~
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39671 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39672 's main window vertically while
39675 \begin_inset space ~
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39695 \begin_inset space ~
39700 will split it horizontally.
39701 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39702 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39703 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39704 three or more documents at the same time.
39705 To close a split view, use the menu
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39712 \begin_inset space ~
39720 \begin_layout Subsection
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39725 Closes a split view.
39728 \begin_layout Subsection
39732 \begin_layout Standard
39733 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39734 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39735 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39736 's main window fullscreen.
39737 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39738 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39741 \begin_layout Section
39743 \begin_inset Index idx
39746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39755 \begin_layout Subsection
39759 \begin_layout Standard
39760 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39767 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39778 \begin_layout Subsection
39780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39782 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39789 \begin_layout Standard
39790 Here you can insert the following characters:
39793 \begin_layout Description
39798 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39801 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39802 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39803 -packages you have installed.
39804 You can get a complete display by checking
39807 \begin_inset space ~
39813 \begin_inset Newline newline
39817 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39825 Not all characters will be visible in the
39829 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39830 dialog (see section
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39837 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39841 ) can display every character.
39849 \begin_layout Description
39850 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39854 \begin_layout Description
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39863 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39870 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39877 \begin_layout Description
39879 \begin_inset space ~
39882 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39892 \begin_layout Description
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39897 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39907 \begin_layout Description
39909 \begin_inset space ~
39912 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39916 \begin_layout Description
39918 \begin_inset space ~
39921 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39925 \begin_layout Description
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39930 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39936 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39942 \begin_layout Description
39944 \begin_inset space ~
39947 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39951 \begin_layout Description
39953 \begin_inset space ~
39957 \begin_inset Index idx
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 \begin_inset Index idx
39970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39971 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39976 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39977 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39979 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39985 \begin_inset Index idx
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39996 \begin_inset Newline newline
39999 More information about this feature can be found in the
40005 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40011 \begin_layout Description
40012 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40014 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40015 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40019 \begin_layout Subsection
40023 \begin_layout Standard
40024 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40027 \begin_layout Description
40028 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40029 \begin_inset script superscript
40031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40040 \begin_layout Description
40041 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40042 \begin_inset script subscript
40044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40053 \begin_layout Description
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40058 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40065 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40072 \begin_layout Description
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40077 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40084 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40091 \begin_layout Description
40093 \begin_inset space ~
40096 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40103 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40110 \begin_layout Description
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40115 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40121 \begin_inset space \space{}
40124 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40125 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40134 To insert a fraction use the command
40139 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40143 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40152 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40159 \begin_layout Description
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40164 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40165 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40171 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40178 \begin_layout Description
40180 \begin_inset space ~
40183 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40184 \begin_inset space ~
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40190 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40197 \begin_layout Description
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40202 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40203 \begin_inset space ~
40207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40209 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40216 \begin_layout Description
40217 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40224 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40231 \begin_layout Description
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40236 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40243 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40250 \begin_layout Description
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40255 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40262 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40269 \begin_layout Description
40271 \begin_inset space ~
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40278 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40287 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40294 for a usage example.
40297 \begin_layout Description
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset space ~
40306 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40307 \begin_inset space ~
40311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40313 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40320 \begin_layout Description
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40325 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40326 as described in section
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40333 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40340 \begin_layout Description
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40345 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40346 \begin_inset space ~
40350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40352 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40359 \begin_layout Description
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40364 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40365 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40373 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40380 \begin_layout Description
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40385 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40392 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40399 \begin_layout Description
40401 \begin_inset space ~
40405 \begin_inset space ~
40408 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40409 \begin_inset space ~
40413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40415 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40422 \begin_layout Subsection
40424 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40428 \begin_layout Standard
40430 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40431 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40432 The submenu allows you to insert
40435 \begin_layout Description
40437 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40439 \begin_inset space ~
40442 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40445 \begin_layout Description
40447 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40453 \begin_inset space ~
40456 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40460 \begin_layout Description
40462 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40467 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40470 \begin_layout Description
40472 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40477 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40480 \begin_layout Description
40482 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40488 \begin_inset space ~
40491 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40495 \begin_layout Description
40497 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40499 \begin_inset space ~
40502 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40505 \begin_layout Description
40507 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40513 \begin_inset space ~
40517 \begin_inset space ~
40520 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40523 \begin_layout Description
40525 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40530 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40533 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40539 \begin_layout Description
40541 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40546 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40548 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40549 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40555 \begin_layout Description
40557 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40558 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40559 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40560 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40563 \begin_layout Subsection
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40572 \begin_inset space ~
40593 are described in section
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40600 reference "sec:toc"
40609 is described in section
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40616 reference "sec:Index"
40624 is described in section
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40631 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40637 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40640 is described in section
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40647 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40654 \begin_layout Subsection
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40659 To insert floats, as described in section
40660 \begin_inset space ~
40664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40666 reference "sec:Floats"
40670 and in detail the chapter
40677 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_layout Subsection
40689 \begin_layout Standard
40690 To insert notes, described in section
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40697 reference "sec:Notes"
40704 \begin_layout Subsection
40708 \begin_layout Standard
40709 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40711 Branches are described in section
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40718 reference "sec:Branches"
40725 \begin_layout Subsection
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40730 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40731 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40733 An example is the document class
40734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40741 with three custom insets.
40744 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40748 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40754 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40757 \begin_layout Subsection
40759 \begin_inset Index idx
40762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40771 \begin_layout Standard
40772 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40774 For more information see chapter
40776 External Document Parts
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40785 \begin_layout Subsection
40787 \begin_inset Index idx
40790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 \begin_layout Standard
40800 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40801 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40808 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_layout Subsection
40820 \begin_layout Standard
40825 dialog as described in section
40826 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40832 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40839 \begin_layout Subsection
40843 \begin_layout Standard
40848 as described in section
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40855 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40862 \begin_layout Subsection
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40871 as described in section
40872 \begin_inset space ~
40876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40878 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40885 \begin_layout Subsection
40887 \begin_inset Index idx
40890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40897 \begin_inset Index idx
40900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40901 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40909 \begin_layout Standard
40910 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40911 Floats are described in section
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40918 reference "sec:Floats"
40922 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40924 Multi-page Captions
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_layout Subsection
40941 \begin_layout Standard
40942 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40949 reference "sec:Index"
40956 \begin_layout Subsection
40960 \begin_layout Standard
40961 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40968 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40975 \begin_layout Subsection
40979 \begin_layout Standard
40980 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40981 Tables are described in section
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40988 reference "sec:Tables"
40992 and in detail in the chapter
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41007 \begin_layout Subsection
41011 \begin_layout Standard
41017 Graphics are described in section
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41024 reference "sec:Graphics"
41031 \begin_layout Subsection
41035 \begin_layout Standard
41036 Inserts a URL as described in section
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41043 reference "subsec:URLs"
41050 \begin_layout Subsection
41054 \begin_layout Standard
41055 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41062 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41069 \begin_layout Subsection
41073 \begin_layout Standard
41074 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41081 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41088 \begin_layout Subsection
41092 \begin_layout Standard
41093 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41094 \begin_inset space ~
41098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41100 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41107 \begin_layout Subsection
41110 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41113 \begin_layout Standard
41114 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41115 environments of the same type.
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41123 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41127 for an explanation.
41130 \begin_layout Subsection
41134 \begin_layout Standard
41135 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41136 title or caption of a float.
41137 Inserts a short title as described in section
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41144 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41151 \begin_layout Subsection
41156 \begin_layout Standard
41157 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41158 Code box as described in section
41159 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41165 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41172 \begin_layout Subsection
41174 \begin_inset Index idx
41177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41186 \begin_layout Standard
41187 Inserts a program listings box.
41188 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41190 Program Code Listings
41195 \begin_inset space ~
41203 \begin_layout Subsection
41205 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41209 \begin_layout Standard
41211 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41212 Inserts the actual date.
41213 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41220 \begin_layout Subsection
41224 \begin_layout Standard
41225 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41232 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41239 \begin_layout Section
41241 \begin_inset Index idx
41244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 \begin_layout Standard
41254 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41258 of the current document.
41259 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41262 \begin_layout Subsection
41266 \begin_layout Standard
41267 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41268 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41269 to jump, for example, between section
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41274 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41275 \begin_inset space ~
41278 2.5 and use the submenu
41281 \begin_inset space ~
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41308 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41312 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41318 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41321 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41324 \begin_layout Standard
41325 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41334 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41342 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41345 \begin_layout Subsection
41346 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41349 \begin_layout Standard
41350 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41354 \begin_layout Subsection
41358 \begin_layout Standard
41359 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41360 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41361 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41377 \begin_layout Subsection
41381 \begin_layout Standard
41382 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41385 The \SpecialChar LyX
41386 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41388 \begin_inset space ~
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41401 manual for a detailed description.
41404 \begin_layout Section
41406 \begin_inset Index idx
41409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41418 \begin_layout Subsection
41422 \begin_layout Standard
41423 Change Tracking is described in section
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41430 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41437 \begin_layout Subsection
41445 \begin_layout Standard
41446 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41447 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41448 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41450 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41451 to the clipboard or update the view.
41452 \begin_inset Newline newline
41455 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41459 \begin_layout Standard
41462 Open Containing Directory
41464 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41465 's temporary folder for the document.
41466 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41467 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41468 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41469 For example some journals require to send the
41473 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41477 \begin_layout Subsection
41478 Start Appendix Here
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41483 as described in section
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41490 reference "sec:Appendices"
41497 \begin_layout Subsection
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41505 \begin_layout Standard
41506 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41507 default output format for the document (menu
41509 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41510 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41511 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41529 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41533 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41536 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41537 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41542 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41547 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41549 \begin_inset space ~
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41565 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41569 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41570 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41573 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41578 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41583 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41593 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41598 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41599 when it is first configured.
41600 The default output format is
41603 \begin_inset space ~
41611 \begin_layout Subsection
41612 View (Other Formats)
41615 \begin_layout Standard
41616 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41617 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41618 actual document with an external program.
41619 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41620 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41621 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41623 All possible formats are listed in section
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41630 reference "subsec:Export"
41635 You should at least see the menu entry
41640 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41642 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41644 \begin_inset space ~
41648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41650 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41655 \begin_inset Index idx
41658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41659 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41668 \begin_layout Standard
41669 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41670 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41672 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41673 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41678 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41683 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41693 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41698 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41699 when it is first configured.
41702 \begin_layout Subsection
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41710 \begin_layout Standard
41711 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41712 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41715 \begin_layout Subsection
41716 Update (Other Formats)
41719 \begin_layout Standard
41720 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41721 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41724 \begin_layout Subsection
41725 View Master Document
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41729 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41745 \begin_inset space ~
41750 manual for more information on this topic).
41751 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41752 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41765 generates the output of the whole book, while
41769 will just output the chapter alone.
41772 \begin_layout Standard
41773 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41774 in the document settings (menu
41776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41777 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41778 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41784 \begin_inset space ~
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41796 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41800 ) or in the preferences (menu
41802 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41803 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41808 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41810 \begin_inset space ~
41813 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset space ~
41829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41831 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41838 \begin_layout Subsection
41839 Update Master Document
41842 \begin_layout Standard
41843 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41864 manual for more information on this topic).
41865 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41866 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41869 \begin_layout Standard
41870 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41871 in the document settings (menu
41873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41874 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41875 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41881 \begin_inset space ~
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41893 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41897 ) or in the preferences (menu
41899 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41900 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41902 \begin_inset space ~
41905 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41907 \begin_inset space ~
41910 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset space ~
41926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41928 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41935 \begin_layout Subsection
41937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41939 name "subsec:Compressed"
41946 \begin_layout Standard
41947 Un/compresses the current document.
41948 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41949 compression (see the
41951 Additional Features
41953 manual for details).
41956 \begin_layout Subsection
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41961 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41964 \begin_layout Subsection
41968 \begin_layout Standard
41969 The document settings are described in appendix
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41976 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41983 \begin_layout Section
41985 \begin_inset Index idx
41988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41997 \begin_layout Subsection
42001 \begin_layout Standard
42002 Spell checking is explained in section
42003 \begin_inset space ~
42007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42009 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42016 \begin_layout Subsection
42020 \begin_layout Standard
42021 The thesaurus is described in section
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42028 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42035 \begin_layout Subsection
42037 \begin_inset Index idx
42040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42047 \begin_inset Index idx
42050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 \begin_layout Standard
42060 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42061 the highlighted document part.
42064 \begin_layout Subsection
42070 \begin_inset Index idx
42073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42074 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42083 \begin_layout Standard
42084 Generates with the help of the program
42086 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42089 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42090 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42091 This feature is not available on Windows.
42094 \begin_layout Subsection
42100 \begin_inset Index idx
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42113 \begin_layout Standard
42114 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42119 \begin_inset space ~
42124 to see the full filename paths.
42127 \begin_layout Subsection
42129 \begin_inset Index idx
42132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 \begin_layout Standard
42142 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42143 files as described in section
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42150 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42157 \begin_layout Subsection
42159 \begin_inset Index idx
42162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42175 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42193 \begin_inset Index idx
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42197 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42206 \begin_layout Standard
42207 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42208 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42209 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42210 -packages and programs it needs; see
42212 \begin_inset space ~
42216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42218 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42225 \begin_layout Subsection
42229 \begin_layout Standard
42234 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42235 \begin_inset space ~
42239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42241 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42248 \begin_layout Section
42250 \begin_inset Index idx
42253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42262 \begin_layout Standard
42263 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42264 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42266 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42270 \begin_layout Standard
42274 \begin_inset space ~
42279 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42280 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42281 packages and classes found
42282 by \SpecialChar LyX
42284 \begin_inset space ~
42288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42290 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42297 \begin_layout Standard
42301 \begin_inset space ~
42306 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42311 \begin_layout Section
42313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42315 name "sec:Toolbars"
42322 \begin_layout Standard
42323 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42330 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42338 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42339 This is described in the
42341 Additional Features
42346 \begin_layout Subsection
42348 \begin_inset Index idx
42351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 \begin_inset Graphics
42362 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42370 \begin_layout Standard
42371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42377 \begin_layout Standard
42378 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 \begin_inset Note Note
42398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42399 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42404 manual for more information.
42412 \begin_layout Standard
42413 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42419 \begin_layout Standard
42420 \begin_inset Tabular
42421 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42422 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42430 \begin_inset Graphics
42431 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42445 pull-down box for the environments
42458 \begin_layout Standard
42459 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42465 \begin_layout Standard
42467 \begin_inset Tabular
42468 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
42469 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42470 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42471 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42525 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42585 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42601 arg "spelling-continuously"
42609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42613 Spellcheck continuously
42619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42649 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42672 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42778 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42818 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42860 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42874 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42875 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42903 Emphasize text, function of the
42904 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
42907 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42909 \begin_inset space ~
42912 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42914 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
42920 arg "dialog-show character"
42931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42952 Set text to noun style, function of the
42953 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
42956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42961 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
42969 arg "dialog-show character"
42980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 arg "textstyle-apply"
42997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43001 Format text using the current settings in the
43002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758229
43005 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43007 \begin_inset space ~
43010 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758229
43018 arg "dialog-show character"
43029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43053 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43073 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43094 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43101 arg "tabular-insert"
43109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43131 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43143 Toggle outline window on/off,
43145 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43161 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43173 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43188 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43200 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43213 \begin_layout Subsection
43215 \begin_inset Index idx
43218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43227 \begin_layout Standard
43228 \begin_inset Graphics
43229 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43237 \begin_layout Standard
43238 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43245 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43249 \begin_layout Standard
43250 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43256 \begin_layout Standard
43257 \begin_inset Tabular
43258 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
43259 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43260 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43262 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43298 arg "layout Enumerate"
43306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43325 arg "layout Itemize"
43333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43370 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43379 arg "layout Description"
43387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43406 arg "depth-increment"
43414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43420 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43444 arg "depth-decrement"
43452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43460 \begin_inset space ~
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 arg "float-insert figure"
43490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43497 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43513 arg "float-insert table"
43521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43528 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43565 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43574 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43650 \begin_inset space ~
43659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43668 arg "nomencl-insert"
43676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 arg "footnote-insert"
43710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43732 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43781 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43801 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43877 \begin_inset space ~
43886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43895 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43910 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43926 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
43934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43961 arg "dialog-show character"
43969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43975 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43980 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43987 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43996 arg "layout-paragraph"
44004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44010 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44012 \begin_inset space ~
44021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44030 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44044 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44058 \begin_layout Subsection
44059 View/Update Toolbar
44060 \begin_inset Index idx
44063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44064 Toolbar ! View / Update
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 \begin_inset Graphics
44074 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44082 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44089 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44093 \begin_layout Standard
44094 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44100 \begin_layout Standard
44101 \begin_inset Tabular
44102 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44103 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44104 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44105 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44129 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 arg "buffer-update"
44153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44175 arg "master-buffer-view"
44183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44209 arg "master-buffer-update"
44217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44247 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44262 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44263 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44264 Synchronize with Output
44270 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44294 View (Other Formats)
44300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 arg "update-others"
44315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44322 Update (Other Formats)
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44336 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44340 \begin_layout Subsection
44344 \begin_layout Standard
44345 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44352 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44356 , the table toolbar
44357 \begin_inset Index idx
44360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44369 \begin_inset space ~
44374 manual and the math macro toolbar
44375 \begin_inset Index idx
44378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44391 \begin_layout Chapter
44392 The Document Settings
44393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44395 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44400 \begin_inset Index idx
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44404 Document ! Settings
44412 \begin_layout Standard
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44421 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44422 is called with the menu
44424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44428 You can save your document settings as default with the
44430 Save as Document Defaults
44432 button in any dialog.
44433 This will create a template named
44437 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44438 when you create a new document without
44442 \begin_layout Standard
44447 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44448 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44451 \begin_layout Standard
44452 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44453 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44454 to find the one you are looking for.
44455 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44456 the submenus of the dialog.
44458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44462 \begin_inset space \space{}
44466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44473 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44474 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44475 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44478 \begin_layout Section
44482 \begin_layout Standard
44483 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44485 Document classes are described in section
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44492 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44500 \begin_layout Standard
44504 \begin_inset space ~
44509 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44514 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44515 as a layout for a document class.
44516 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44518 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44527 \begin_layout Standard
44528 Some classes use special class options by default.
44529 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44533 and you can decide to use them or not.
44534 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44535 recommended you leave them untouched.
44540 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44541 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44546 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44548 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44554 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44555 \begin_inset Newline newline
44560 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44563 \begin_inset Newline newline
44566 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44567 distribution, see section
44572 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44574 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44587 \begin_layout Standard
44592 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44593 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44594 in the background if the child document
44595 is opened without its master.
44596 This way child documents are always compilable.
44597 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44604 \begin_inset space ~
44612 \begin_layout Standard
44613 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44624 \begin_inset Index idx
44627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44629 packages ! prettyref
44635 \begin_inset Index idx
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44640 packages ! refstyle
44645 for cross-references, see section
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44652 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44659 \begin_layout Section
44663 \begin_layout Standard
44664 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44665 Please refer to the section
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44676 \begin_inset space ~
44681 manual for details.
44684 \begin_layout Section
44688 \begin_layout Standard
44689 Modules are explained in section
44690 \begin_inset space ~
44694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44696 reference "subsec:Modules"
44703 \begin_layout Section
44707 \begin_layout Standard
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44715 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44722 \begin_layout Section
44726 \begin_layout Standard
44727 The document font settings are described in section
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44734 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44741 \begin_layout Section
44745 \begin_layout Standard
44746 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44758 \begin_inset space ~
44763 and whether it should be a
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44771 can also be specified here.
44774 \begin_layout Standard
44775 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44776 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44777 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44779 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44782 \begin_layout Standard
44785 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44788 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44789 justifies the text on screen.
44790 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44794 \begin_layout Section
44798 \begin_layout Standard
44799 This dialog is described in sections
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44806 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44813 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44820 \begin_layout Section
44824 \begin_layout Standard
44825 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44832 reference "subsec:Margins"
44839 \begin_layout Section
44841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44843 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44848 \begin_inset Index idx
44851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44852 Language ! Encoding
44860 \begin_layout Standard
44861 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44862 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44863 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44865 is always encoded in utf8).
44866 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44867 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44868 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44869 -command is not known for
44870 a particular character).
44873 \begin_layout Standard
44874 If you use the option
44879 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
44880 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
44881 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44883 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
44884 exactly one encoding.
44885 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
44888 \begin_layout Standard
44890 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
44891 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
44892 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44893 installation supports Unicode), choose
44894 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
44895 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44896 is quite incomplete, so
44897 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
44902 (when \SpecialChar LyX
44903 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44904 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
44905 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44906 -commands is not used, because all
44907 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
44908 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44909 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44910 , two new alternative engines
44911 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44913 Both engines support Unicode natively.
44915 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44926 \begin_inset space ~
44934 \begin_inset space ~
44940 \begin_inset space ~
44944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44946 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44951 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
44955 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
44958 \begin_layout Standard
44962 \begin_inset space ~
44967 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44968 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
44970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44978 The possible settings are:
44981 \begin_layout Description
44982 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44984 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44985 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44995 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45002 \begin_layout Description
45003 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45004 format you will use.
45005 In many cases this will be
45010 \begin_inset Index idx
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45021 If the newer package
45026 \begin_inset Index idx
45029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 packages ! polyglossia
45036 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45037 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45038 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45040 this package will be used instead of
45047 \begin_layout Description
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45060 would be more appropriate.
45063 \begin_layout Description
45064 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45065 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45069 (for German texts), type in
45072 \begin_inset Newline newline
45077 usepackage{ngerman}
45080 \begin_layout Description
45081 None will not use a language package.
45082 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45085 \begin_layout Standard
45086 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45089 \begin_layout Description
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45095 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_inset space ~
45106 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45112 \begin_inset Index idx
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45117 packages ! inputenc
45123 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45124 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45125 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45129 \begin_layout Description
45130 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45132 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45133 commands, which may result in a big
45134 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45135 -commands are needed.
45138 \begin_layout Description
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45144 \begin_inset space ~
45147 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45150 \begin_layout Description
45152 \begin_inset space ~
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45159 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45167 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45170 \begin_layout Description
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45179 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45180 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45183 \begin_layout Description
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45192 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45196 \begin_layout Description
45198 \begin_inset space ~
45202 \begin_inset space ~
45205 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45206 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45209 \begin_layout Description
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45222 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45229 \begin_layout Description
45231 \begin_inset space ~
45235 \begin_inset space ~
45239 \begin_inset space ~
45242 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45243 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45246 \begin_layout Description
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45252 \begin_inset space ~
45255 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45256 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45257 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45258 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45263 \begin_inset space ~
45269 \begin_layout Description
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45278 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45279 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45280 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45282 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45287 \begin_inset space ~
45293 \begin_layout Description
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45299 \begin_inset space ~
45302 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45305 \begin_layout Description
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45314 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45317 \begin_layout Description
45319 \begin_inset space ~
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45326 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45329 \begin_layout Description
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45334 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45337 \begin_layout Description
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45342 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45345 \begin_layout Description
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45351 \begin_inset space ~
45354 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45357 \begin_layout Description
45359 \begin_inset space ~
45363 \begin_inset space ~
45369 \begin_layout Description
45371 \begin_inset space ~
45375 \begin_inset space ~
45378 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45381 \begin_layout Description
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45387 \begin_inset space ~
45393 \begin_layout Description
45395 \begin_inset space ~
45399 \begin_inset space ~
45402 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45408 \begin_inset Index idx
45411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45418 , when using this, set the document language to
45423 \begin_layout Description
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45432 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45437 , when using this, set the document language to
45440 \begin_inset space ~
45446 \begin_layout Description
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45452 \begin_inset space ~
45455 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45461 \begin_inset Index idx
45464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45466 packages ! japanese
45471 , when using this, set the document language to
45476 \begin_layout Description
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45485 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45490 , when using this, set the document language to
45495 \begin_layout Description
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45504 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45509 , when using this, set the document language to
45514 \begin_layout Description
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45522 \begin_layout Description
45524 \begin_inset space ~
45528 \begin_inset space ~
45532 \begin_inset space ~
45535 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45538 \begin_layout Description
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset space ~
45548 \begin_inset space ~
45551 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45552 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45553 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45556 \begin_layout Description
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45562 \begin_inset space ~
45568 \begin_layout Description
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45574 \begin_inset space ~
45577 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45578 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45581 \begin_layout Description
45583 \begin_inset space ~
45587 \begin_inset space ~
45590 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45596 \begin_inset Index idx
45599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45606 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45609 \begin_layout Description
45611 \begin_inset space ~
45619 \begin_inset space ~
45622 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45629 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45632 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45639 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45640 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45642 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45645 \begin_layout Description
45647 \begin_inset space ~
45651 \begin_inset space ~
45654 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45660 \begin_inset Index idx
45663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45670 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45673 \begin_layout Description
45675 \begin_inset space ~
45678 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45684 \begin_inset Index idx
45687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45689 packages ! inputenc
45695 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45699 \begin_layout Description
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45709 \begin_inset space ~
45712 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45713 \begin_inset space ~
45719 \begin_layout Description
45721 \begin_inset space ~
45725 \begin_inset space ~
45729 \begin_inset space ~
45732 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45733 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45734 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45738 \begin_layout Description
45740 \begin_inset space ~
45744 \begin_inset space ~
45748 \begin_inset space ~
45751 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45752 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45755 \begin_layout Section
45757 \begin_inset Index idx
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45767 \begin_inset Index idx
45770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45777 \begin_inset Index idx
45780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45781 Color ! Shaded boxes
45787 \begin_inset Index idx
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45791 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45799 \begin_layout Standard
45800 Here you can alter the font color for the
45804 (default: black), for
45807 \begin_inset space ~
45812 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45816 (default: white) and for
45819 \begin_inset space ~
45829 sets the color back to the default.
45832 \begin_layout Standard
45833 Clicking any button showing
45841 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45842 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45843 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45844 later more quickly.
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45848 Note, if you change the
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45856 font color and use the option
45859 \begin_inset space ~
45864 in the document settings under
45867 \begin_inset space ~
45872 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45873 \begin_inset space ~
45877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45879 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45886 \begin_layout Standard
45887 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
45893 \begin_layout Standard
45897 \begin_inset space ~
45906 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
45909 \begin_inset space ~
45912 Code after a forced page break:
45915 \begin_layout Itemize
45916 For the page color:
45917 \begin_inset Newline newline
45924 pagecolor{color name}
45927 \begin_layout Itemize
45928 For the text color:
45929 \begin_inset Newline newline
45939 \begin_layout Standard
45940 You are restricted to one of
45976 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45983 \begin_inset space ~
45989 \begin_inset Newline newline
45992 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45993 names to refer to them:
45996 \begin_layout Itemize
46002 \begin_inset Newline newline
46007 page_backgroundcolor
46010 \begin_layout Itemize
46014 \begin_inset space ~
46020 \begin_inset Newline newline
46028 \begin_layout Itemize
46032 \begin_inset space ~
46038 \begin_inset Newline newline
46046 \begin_layout Itemize
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46056 \begin_inset Newline newline
46064 \begin_layout Standard
46065 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46068 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_inset space ~
46084 \begin_layout Section
46088 \begin_layout Standard
46089 Here you can adjust the
46093 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46097 as described in section
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46104 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46111 \begin_layout Section
46115 \begin_layout Standard
46116 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46122 \begin_inset Index idx
46125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46127 packages ! biblatex
46137 \begin_inset Index idx
46140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46152 \begin_inset Index idx
46155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46166 Sectioned bibliography
46168 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46174 \begin_inset Index idx
46177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46179 packages ! bibtopic
46189 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46190 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46194 for the generation of the bibliography.
46195 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46196 \begin_inset space ~
46200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46202 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46209 \begin_layout Section
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 Here you can define the
46218 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46226 reference "sec:Index"
46233 \begin_layout Section
46237 \begin_layout Standard
46238 The PDF properties are explained in section
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46245 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46252 \begin_layout Section
46256 \begin_layout Standard
46257 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46258 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46264 \begin_inset Index idx
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 \begin_inset Index idx
46282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 \begin_inset Index idx
46297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46309 \begin_inset Index idx
46312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46324 \begin_inset Index idx
46327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46329 packages ! mathdots
46339 \begin_inset Index idx
46342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46344 packages ! mathtools
46354 \begin_inset Index idx
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 \begin_inset Index idx
46372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46374 packages ! stackrel
46384 \begin_inset Index idx
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 packages ! stmaryrd
46399 \begin_inset Index idx
46402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46404 packages ! undertilde
46409 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46412 \begin_layout Description
46413 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46414 -errors in formulas,
46415 ensure that you have this enabled.
46418 \begin_layout Description
46419 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46420 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46421 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46425 \begin_layout Description
46426 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46441 \begin_layout Description
46442 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46445 \begin_inset space ~
46457 \begin_layout Description
46458 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46469 \begin_layout Description
46470 mathtools is used for the math commands
46506 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46513 \begin_layout Description
46514 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46516 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46525 \begin_layout Description
46526 stackrel is used for the math command
46543 \begin_layout Description
46544 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46547 \begin_layout Description
46548 undertilde is used for the math command
46556 Accents for one Character
46565 \begin_layout Section
46567 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46569 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46577 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46578 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46583 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46584 The float placement options
46585 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46588 are described in the section
46591 \begin_inset space ~
46595 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46597 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46605 \begin_inset space ~
46613 \begin_layout Section
46617 \begin_layout Standard
46618 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46620 Program Code Listings
46625 \begin_inset space ~
46633 \begin_layout Section
46637 \begin_layout Standard
46638 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46646 set to be used and set the
46651 The itemize environment is described in section
46652 \begin_inset space ~
46656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46658 reference "sec:Itemize"
46665 \begin_layout Standard
46666 You can furthermore specify a
46669 \begin_inset space ~
46674 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46675 command of the desired character.
46676 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46683 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46689 \begin_inset space \space{}
46693 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46703 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46704 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46707 \begin_layout Standard
46708 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46716 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46717 -packages in the preamble (menu
46720 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46721 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46724 \begin_inset space ~
46730 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46734 usepackage{textcomp}
46737 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46741 usepackage{amssymb}
46751 \begin_layout Section
46755 \begin_layout Standard
46756 Branches are described in section
46757 \begin_inset space ~
46761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46763 reference "sec:Branches"
46770 \begin_layout Section
46772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46774 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46781 \begin_layout Standard
46782 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46785 \begin_layout Description
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46791 \begin_inset space ~
46794 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46814 View Master Document
46815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46822 Update Master Document
46823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46830 menu or the toolbar.
46831 The default is set in
46833 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46834 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46836 \begin_inset space ~
46839 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46843 \begin_inset space ~
46847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46849 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46856 \begin_layout Description
46858 \begin_inset space ~
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46865 Output settings for the menu
46867 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46869 \begin_inset space ~
46875 For a detailed description see section
46877 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46890 \begin_layout Description
46892 \begin_inset space ~
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46899 Options offers settings for the export format
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46912 will assure that the output follows exactly version
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46916 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
46920 \begin_inset space ~
46925 settings are described in detail in section
46927 Math Output in XHTML
46932 \begin_inset space ~
46941 \begin_inset space ~
46945 \begin_inset space ~
46950 is used for the size of equations in the output.
46953 \begin_layout Description
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46960 Save transient properties
46962 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
46963 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
46964 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
46968 \begin_layout Itemize
46969 the activation of change tracking
46972 \begin_layout Itemize
46973 the output of tracked changes
46976 \begin_layout Itemize
46977 the recording of the document directory path.
46980 \begin_layout Standard
46981 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
46982 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
46986 \begin_layout Section
46994 \begin_layout Standard
46995 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46997 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
46999 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47001 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47005 \begin_layout Standard
47006 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47007 -syntax is given in section
47008 \begin_inset space ~
47012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47014 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47021 \begin_layout Chapter
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47029 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47034 \begin_inset Index idx
47037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47046 \begin_layout Standard
47047 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47049 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47053 It has the following submenus.
47056 \begin_layout Section
47060 \begin_layout Subsection
47064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47065 User Interface File
47066 \begin_inset Index idx
47069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 Customization ! of toolbars
47076 \begin_inset Index idx
47079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47080 Customization ! of menus
47088 \begin_layout Standard
47089 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47090 interface (ui) file.
47091 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47099 \begin_layout Description
47104 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47107 \begin_layout Description
47114 the menu entries in popup context menus
47117 \begin_layout Description
47122 specifies the toolbar buttons
47125 \begin_layout Standard
47126 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47127 and edit the entries.
47130 \begin_layout Standard
47131 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47143 entries must be finished with an explicit
47168 and in the case of the
47169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47181 The syntax for the entries is:
47184 \begin_layout Standard
47185 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47214 \begin_layout Standard
47216 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47219 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47220 -functions are listed in the menu
47222 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47224 \begin_inset space ~
47232 \begin_layout Standard
47233 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47239 \begin_layout Standard
47240 For example, assuming you use the menu
47242 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47245 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47249 \begin_layout Standard
47250 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47274 \begin_layout Standard
47276 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47291 to have the sixth bookmark.
47294 \begin_layout Standard
47298 \begin_inset space ~
47303 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47304 's toolbar buttons.
47305 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47309 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47321 \begin_layout Standard
47324 Enable tool tips in main work area
47326 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47334 \begin_layout Standard
47339 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47340 should display in the menu
47342 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47352 \begin_layout Subsection
47356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47360 \begin_layout Standard
47363 Restore window layouts and geometries
47366 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47367 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47371 \begin_layout Standard
47374 Restore cursor positions
47376 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47380 \begin_layout Standard
47383 Load opened files from last session
47385 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47389 \begin_layout Standard
47392 Clear all session information
47394 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47395 sessions (cursor positions, names
47396 of last opened documents, etc.).
47399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47403 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47408 \begin_inset Index idx
47411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47420 \begin_layout Standard
47423 Backup original documents when saving
47425 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47426 it was saved the last time.
47427 It is stored in the
47430 \begin_inset space ~
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47442 reference "sec:Paths"
47446 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47455 The backup file has the file extension
47456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47470 \begin_layout Standard
47473 Backup documents, every
47475 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47478 \begin_layout Standard
47481 Save documents compressed by default
47483 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47484 \begin_inset space ~
47488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47490 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47495 This applies to newly created documents only.
47496 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47499 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47500 Windows & work area
47503 \begin_layout Standard
47506 Open documents in tabs
47508 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47512 \begin_layout Standard
47517 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47524 \begin_inset space ~
47528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47530 reference "sec:Paths"
47534 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47541 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47542 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47543 of \SpecialChar LyX
47545 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47546 instance is created for each file.
47549 \begin_layout Standard
47552 Single close-tab button
47554 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47564 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47565 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47566 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47570 \begin_layout Standard
47571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47579 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47580 before the change takes effect.
47588 \begin_layout Standard
47593 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47595 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47597 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47601 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47602 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47603 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47606 \begin_layout Subsection
47608 \begin_inset Index idx
47611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47620 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47627 \begin_layout Standard
47628 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47632 \begin_layout Standard
47633 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47641 This section only deals with the fonts
47645 the \SpecialChar LyX
47647 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47651 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47662 \begin_layout Standard
47663 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47680 (depends on the system) as its
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47699 \begin_layout Standard
47700 You can change the font size with the
47707 \begin_layout Standard
47712 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47717 points have the size of 1
47718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47722 \begin_inset space ~
47726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47728 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47733 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47738 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47739 \begin_inset space ~
47743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47745 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47752 \begin_layout Subsection
47754 \begin_inset Index idx
47757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47758 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47765 \begin_inset Index idx
47768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47777 \begin_layout Standard
47778 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47779 by choosing an item in the
47780 list and selecting the
47787 \begin_layout Standard
47788 By checking the option
47792 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47795 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47796 \begin_inset space ~
47800 \begin_inset space ~
47805 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47808 \begin_layout Subsection
47810 \begin_inset Index idx
47813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47822 \begin_layout Standard
47823 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47827 \begin_layout Standard
47832 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47833 This feature is described in section
47834 \begin_inset space ~
47838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47840 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47847 \begin_layout Standard
47848 Checking the option
47851 \begin_inset space ~
47855 \begin_inset space ~
47859 \begin_inset space ~
47864 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47867 \begin_layout Section
47869 \begin_inset Index idx
47872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47881 \begin_layout Subsection
47885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47889 \begin_layout Standard
47892 Cursor follows scrollbar
47894 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
47898 \begin_layout Standard
47899 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
47900 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
47901 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
47904 \begin_layout Standard
47907 Scroll below end of document
47909 is self-explanatory.
47912 \begin_layout Standard
47913 In \SpecialChar LyX
47914 one can jump from word to word by pressing
47921 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
47923 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
47924 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
47927 \begin_layout Standard
47930 Sort environments alphabetically
47932 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47935 \begin_layout Standard
47938 Group environments by their category
47940 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47943 \begin_layout Standard
47948 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
47959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47963 \begin_layout Standard
47964 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
47969 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
47970 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
47974 \begin_layout Subsection
47976 \begin_inset Index idx
47979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47986 \begin_inset Index idx
47989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47990 Settings ! Shortcuts
47998 \begin_layout Standard
48003 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48005 Several binding files are available, among them:
48008 \begin_layout Description
48009 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48012 \begin_layout Description
48013 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48025 \begin_layout Description
48026 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48037 \begin_layout Standard
48038 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48043 , and binding files for special languages.
48044 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48049 \begin_inset space \space{}
48053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48061 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48062 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48063 will try to use the appropriate binding
48067 \begin_layout Standard
48068 Some binding files, like
48072 , only have a limited scope.
48073 When looking at the end of the file
48077 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48080 \begin_layout Standard
48084 \begin_inset space ~
48088 \begin_inset space ~
48093 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48094 in the selected key binding file.
48097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48101 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48106 \begin_inset Index idx
48109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48110 Key Bindings ! Editing
48118 \begin_layout Standard
48119 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48120 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48121 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48122 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48125 Show key-bindings containing
48128 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48129 Insert there for example as keyword
48130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48137 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48138 functions that contain
48139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48147 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48148 All \SpecialChar LyX
48149 functions are also listed in the file
48154 that you will find in the
48161 \begin_layout Standard
48162 For example, to add the shortcut
48170 , select the function and press the
48175 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48176 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48179 \begin_layout Standard
48180 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48181 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48183 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48184 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48186 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48191 \begin_layout Standard
48192 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48195 \begin_layout Standard
48196 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48198 The syntax of the entries is:
48201 \begin_layout Standard
48207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48226 \begin_layout Standard
48227 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48228 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48256 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48257 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48258 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48259 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48261 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48265 , you needed to specify it as
48270 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48273 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48276 \begin_layout Subsection
48278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48280 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48285 \begin_inset Index idx
48288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48295 \begin_inset Index idx
48298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48299 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48307 \begin_layout Standard
48308 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48309 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48310 provides keyboard maps.
48311 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48312 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48315 \begin_inset space ~
48319 \begin_inset space ~
48324 and select the keyboard map file named
48331 \begin_layout Standard
48340 keyboard map and, if you use the
48344 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48347 arg "keymap-primary"
48353 arg "keymap-secondary"
48356 respectively or toggle between them with
48359 arg "keymap-toggle"
48365 \begin_layout Standard
48366 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48374 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48383 \begin_layout Standard
48384 You can also specify the mouse
48386 Wheel scrolling speed
48389 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48393 Middle mouse button pasting
48395 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48396 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48399 \begin_layout Standard
48407 \begin_inset space ~
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48416 you can select a key for zooming.
48417 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48420 \begin_layout Subsection
48424 \begin_layout Standard
48425 Input completion is described in section
48426 \begin_inset space ~
48430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48432 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48439 \begin_layout Section
48441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48448 \begin_inset Index idx
48451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48458 \begin_inset Index idx
48461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48470 \begin_layout Standard
48471 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48472 are normally determined during
48474 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48477 \begin_layout Description
48479 \begin_inset space ~
48482 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48483 's working directory.
48484 It is the default when you
48495 \begin_inset space ~
48503 \begin_layout Description
48505 \begin_inset space ~
48508 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48510 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48512 \begin_inset space ~
48516 \begin_inset space ~
48524 \begin_layout Description
48526 \begin_inset space ~
48529 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48535 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48539 \begin_inset Newline newline
48543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48555 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48556 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48564 \begin_layout Description
48566 \begin_inset space ~
48570 \begin_inset Index idx
48573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48579 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48580 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48581 \begin_inset space ~
48585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48587 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48595 will be used to save the backups.
48596 \begin_inset Newline newline
48599 Backup files have the ending
48600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48610 \begin_layout Description
48612 \begin_inset space ~
48615 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48616 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48618 \begin_inset Newline newline
48625 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48631 You can edit this file with the program
48640 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48641 in its preferences under
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48650 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48655 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48657 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48658 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48664 and \SpecialChar LyX
48665 need to be running the same time.
48666 \begin_inset Newline newline
48669 The pipe is also used for the
48673 feature, see section
48674 \begin_inset space ~
48678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48680 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48685 \begin_inset Newline newline
48688 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48689 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48690 \begin_inset Newline newline
48706 \begin_layout Description
48708 \begin_inset space ~
48711 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48714 \begin_layout Description
48716 \begin_inset space ~
48719 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48720 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48721 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48724 \begin_layout Description
48726 \begin_inset space ~
48729 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48735 You only need to specify it if you are using
48739 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48741 For \SpecialChar LyX
48746 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48750 \begin_layout Description
48752 \begin_inset space ~
48755 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48756 When \SpecialChar LyX
48757 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48758 to find it on the system.
48759 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48761 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48770 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48771 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48774 \begin_layout Description
48776 \begin_inset space ~
48779 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48780 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48781 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48782 code or in the document
48784 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48786 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48787 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48788 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48789 scanned for the input files.
48790 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48791 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48793 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48794 compilation may fail for some documents.
48797 \begin_layout Section
48801 \begin_layout Standard
48802 Here you can insert your
48811 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48813 \begin_inset space ~
48817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48819 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48823 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48826 \begin_layout Section
48828 \begin_inset Index idx
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48832 Language ! Settings
48838 \begin_inset Index idx
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 Settings ! Language
48850 \begin_layout Subsection
48852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48854 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48861 \begin_layout Description
48863 \begin_inset space ~
48867 \begin_inset space ~
48870 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48872 You can find its actual translation status here:
48873 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48875 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
48883 \begin_layout Description
48885 \begin_inset space ~
48888 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
48889 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
48890 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
48891 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
48892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48908 The most widespread language package is
48913 \begin_inset Index idx
48916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48923 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
48925 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48926 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48927 come with the alternative
48933 \begin_inset Index idx
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48938 packages ! polyglossia
48943 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
48944 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
48950 The available selections are described in section
48951 \begin_inset space ~
48955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48957 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
48964 \begin_layout Description
48966 \begin_inset space ~
48969 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48970 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
48971 you can here specify the command to start the package.
48972 An example is the start command
48978 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
48980 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
48984 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49000 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49005 \begin_layout Description
49007 \begin_inset space ~
49015 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49016 command toggles the package on and off.
49019 \begin_layout Description
49021 \begin_inset space ~
49025 \begin_inset space ~
49028 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49032 \begin_layout Description
49034 \begin_inset space ~
49038 \begin_inset space ~
49041 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49045 \begin_layout Description
49047 \begin_inset space ~
49051 \begin_inset space ~
49054 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49055 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49056 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49058 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49065 \begin_layout Description
49067 \begin_inset space ~
49070 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49072 When this option is not set, the
49075 \begin_inset space ~
49080 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49082 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49085 \begin_inset space ~
49093 \begin_layout Description
49095 \begin_inset space ~
49101 \begin_inset space ~
49107 When it is not set, the
49110 \begin_inset space ~
49115 is set to the end of the document.
49118 \begin_layout Description
49120 \begin_inset space ~
49124 \begin_inset space ~
49127 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49128 language will be underlined in blue.
49131 \begin_layout Description
49133 \begin_inset space ~
49137 \begin_inset space ~
49140 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49141 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49144 \begin_layout Description
49146 \begin_inset space ~
49149 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49150 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49151 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49152 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49155 \begin_layout Subsection
49159 \begin_layout Standard
49160 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49161 \begin_inset space ~
49165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49167 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49174 \begin_layout Section
49178 \begin_layout Subsection
49180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49182 name "subsec:General-output"
49189 \begin_layout Description
49191 \begin_inset space ~
49194 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49196 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49198 \begin_inset space ~
49204 For a detailed description see section
49206 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49211 \begin_inset space ~
49219 \begin_layout Description
49221 \begin_inset space ~
49224 Options Options for the program
49228 that is used for the export format
49233 \begin_inset space ~
49237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49239 reference "subsec:Export"
49244 Possible options are listed in the
49249 \begin_inset Newline newline
49253 \begin_inset Flex URL
49256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49258 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49268 \begin_layout Description
49270 \begin_inset space ~
49274 \begin_inset space ~
49277 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49280 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49281 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49283 \begin_inset space ~
49289 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49292 \begin_layout Description
49294 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
49296 \begin_inset space ~
49300 \begin_inset Index idx
49303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49310 \begin_inset Index idx
49313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49314 Settings ! Date format
49319 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49320 \begin_inset Newline newline
49324 \begin_inset Flex URL
49327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49329 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49335 \begin_inset Newline newline
49338 For example the format
49339 \begin_inset Newline newline
49343 \begin_inset Newline newline
49346 prints the date as day/month/year.
49351 \begin_layout Description
49353 \begin_inset space ~
49357 \begin_inset space ~
49360 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49361 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49364 \begin_layout Subsection
49370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49372 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49377 \begin_inset Index idx
49380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49381 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49390 \begin_layout Description
49392 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49394 \begin_inset space ~
49402 \begin_inset space ~
49406 \begin_inset space ~
49409 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49414 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49435 are used for Cyrillic.
49436 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49449 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49451 sets up in the background.
49452 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49457 \begin_layout Description
49459 \begin_inset space ~
49463 \begin_inset space ~
49467 \begin_inset space ~
49471 \begin_inset space ~
49474 options They only have an effect when the program
49478 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49481 \begin_layout Standard
49482 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49483 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49484 manuals of the applications.
49487 \begin_layout Description
49489 \begin_inset space ~
49492 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49493 \begin_inset space ~
49497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49499 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49506 \begin_layout Description
49508 \begin_inset space ~
49511 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49512 \begin_inset space ~
49516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49518 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49525 \begin_layout Description
49527 \begin_inset space ~
49530 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49531 \begin_inset space ~
49535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49537 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49544 \begin_layout Description
49550 \begin_inset space ~
49553 command Command for the program
49555 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49558 that is described in the section
49560 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49565 Additional Features
49570 \begin_layout Standard
49571 There are additionally the following options:
49574 \begin_layout Description
49576 \begin_inset space ~
49580 \begin_inset space ~
49584 \begin_inset space ~
49588 \begin_inset space ~
49593 \begin_inset space ~
49596 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49614 to separate folders.
49615 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49617 \begin_inset Index idx
49620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49627 \begin_inset Index idx
49630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49639 \begin_layout Description
49641 \begin_inset space ~
49645 \begin_inset space ~
49649 \begin_inset space ~
49653 \begin_inset space ~
49657 \begin_inset space ~
49661 \begin_inset space ~
49664 changes Removes all manually set
49670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49671 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49673 \begin_inset space ~
49678 dialog when changing the document class.
49681 \begin_layout Section
49683 \begin_inset space ~
49687 \begin_inset Index idx
49690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49699 \begin_layout Subsection
49701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49703 name "subsec:Converters"
49708 \begin_inset Index idx
49711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49720 \begin_layout Standard
49721 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49722 from one format to another.
49723 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49724 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49731 \begin_inset space ~
49736 field and press the
49741 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49745 \begin_inset space ~
49750 drop-down list, modify the
49754 field and press the
49761 \begin_layout Standard
49764 Converter File Cache
49770 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49772 Maximum Age (in days
49775 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49776 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49779 \begin_layout Standard
49780 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49781 definition, is described in the section
49792 \begin_layout Subsection
49794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49796 name "sec:File-Formats"
49801 \begin_inset Index idx
49804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49811 \begin_inset Index idx
49814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49823 \begin_layout Standard
49824 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49834 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49837 \begin_layout Standard
49838 You can also define the
49840 Default output format
49842 that is used when you use
49844 View, Update, View Master Document
49848 Update Master Document
49854 menu or the toolbar.
49857 \begin_layout Standard
49858 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49869 \begin_layout Standard
49870 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49872 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49873 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49874 This is done by specifying a
49879 More about this is described in the section
49890 \begin_layout Chapter
49891 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49893 \begin_inset Index idx
49896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49905 name "chap:Units-available-in"
49912 \begin_layout Standard
49914 \begin_inset space ~
49918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49920 reference "tab:Units"
49924 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49925 and used in this documentation.
49928 \begin_layout Standard
49929 \begin_inset Float table
49936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49937 \begin_inset Caption Standard
49939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49955 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49963 \begin_inset Tabular
49964 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
49965 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
49966 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49967 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
49968 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50121 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50392 scaled point (65536
50393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50460 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50584 % of original image width
50589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50673 \begin_layout Standard
50674 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50677 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50684 \begin_layout Bibliography
50685 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50686 LatexCommand bibitem
50693 The \SpecialChar LyX
50695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50698 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50704 \begin_inset Newline newline
50708 \begin_inset Flex URL
50711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50713 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50721 \begin_layout Bibliography
50722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50723 LatexCommand bibitem
50724 key "latexcompanion"
50729 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50731 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50732 Companion Second Edition.
50735 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50738 \begin_layout Bibliography
50739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50740 LatexCommand bibitem
50746 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50749 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50753 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50756 \begin_layout Bibliography
50757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50758 LatexCommand bibitem
50767 : A Document Preparation System.
50770 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50773 \begin_layout Bibliography
50774 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50775 LatexCommand bibitem
50785 The \SpecialChar TeX
50789 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50792 \begin_layout Bibliography
50793 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50794 LatexCommand bibitem
50800 The \SpecialChar TeX
50802 \begin_inset Newline newline
50806 \begin_inset Flex URL
50809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50811 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50819 \begin_layout Bibliography
50820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50821 LatexCommand bibitem
50827 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50829 \begin_inset Newline newline
50833 \begin_inset Flex URL
50836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50838 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50846 \begin_layout Bibliography
50847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50848 LatexCommand bibitem
50855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50857 name "Documentation"
50858 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50865 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50869 \begin_inset Newline newline
50873 \begin_inset Flex URL
50876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50878 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
50886 \begin_layout Bibliography
50887 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50888 LatexCommand bibitem
50895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50897 name "Documentation"
50898 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
50903 how to use the program
50905 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50909 \begin_inset Newline newline
50913 \begin_inset Flex URL
50916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50918 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
50926 \begin_layout Bibliography
50927 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50928 LatexCommand bibitem
50935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50937 name "Documentation"
50938 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
50943 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50949 \begin_inset Index idx
50952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50954 packages ! biblatex
50960 \begin_inset Newline newline
50964 \begin_inset Flex URL
50967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50969 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
50977 \begin_layout Bibliography
50978 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50979 LatexCommand bibitem
50986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50988 name "Documentation"
50989 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
50994 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51000 \begin_inset Index idx
51003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51011 \begin_inset Newline newline
51015 \begin_inset Flex URL
51018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51020 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51028 \begin_layout Bibliography
51029 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51030 LatexCommand bibitem
51037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51039 name "Documentation"
51040 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51050 \begin_inset Newline newline
51054 \begin_inset Flex URL
51057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51059 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51067 \begin_layout Bibliography
51068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51069 LatexCommand bibitem
51070 key "makeindex-man"
51076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51079 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51089 \begin_inset Newline newline
51093 \begin_inset Flex URL
51096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51098 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51106 \begin_layout Bibliography
51107 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51108 LatexCommand bibitem
51115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51117 name "Documentation"
51118 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51128 \begin_inset Newline newline
51132 \begin_inset Flex URL
51135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51137 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51145 \begin_layout Bibliography
51146 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51147 LatexCommand bibitem
51154 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51156 name "Documentation"
51157 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51162 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51164 \begin_inset Newline newline
51168 \begin_inset Flex URL
51171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51173 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51181 \begin_layout Bibliography
51182 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51183 LatexCommand bibitem
51190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51192 name "Documentation"
51193 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51198 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51204 \begin_inset Index idx
51207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51215 \begin_inset Newline newline
51219 \begin_inset Flex URL
51222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51224 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51232 \begin_layout Bibliography
51233 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51234 LatexCommand bibitem
51241 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51243 name "Documentation"
51244 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51249 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51255 \begin_inset Index idx
51258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51260 packages ! enumitem
51266 \begin_inset Newline newline
51270 \begin_inset Flex URL
51273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51275 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51283 \begin_layout Bibliography
51284 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51285 LatexCommand bibitem
51292 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51294 name "Documentation"
51295 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51300 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51306 \begin_inset Index idx
51309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51311 packages ! fancyhdr
51317 \begin_inset Newline newline
51321 \begin_inset Flex URL
51324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51326 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51334 \begin_layout Bibliography
51335 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51336 LatexCommand bibitem
51343 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51345 name "Documentation"
51346 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51351 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51357 \begin_inset Index idx
51360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51362 packages ! hyperref
51368 \begin_inset Newline newline
51372 \begin_inset Flex URL
51375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51377 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51385 \begin_layout Bibliography
51386 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51387 LatexCommand bibitem
51394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51396 name "Documentation"
51397 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51402 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51408 \begin_inset Index idx
51411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51413 packages ! microtpye
51419 \begin_inset Newline newline
51423 \begin_inset Flex URL
51426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51428 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51436 \begin_layout Bibliography
51437 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51438 LatexCommand bibitem
51445 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51447 name "Documentation"
51448 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51453 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51459 \begin_inset Index idx
51462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51470 \begin_inset Newline newline
51474 \begin_inset Flex URL
51477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51479 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51487 \begin_layout Bibliography
51488 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51489 LatexCommand bibitem
51496 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51498 name "Documentation"
51499 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51504 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51510 \begin_inset Index idx
51513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51515 packages ! prettyref
51521 \begin_inset Newline newline
51525 \begin_inset Flex URL
51528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51530 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51538 \begin_layout Bibliography
51539 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51540 LatexCommand bibitem
51547 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51549 name "Documentation"
51550 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51555 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51561 \begin_inset Index idx
51564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51566 packages ! refstyle
51572 \begin_inset Newline newline
51576 \begin_inset Flex URL
51579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51581 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51589 \begin_layout Bibliography
51590 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51591 LatexCommand bibitem
51598 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51601 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51606 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51608 \begin_inset Newline newline
51612 \begin_inset Flex URL
51615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51617 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51625 \begin_layout Bibliography
51626 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51627 LatexCommand bibitem
51634 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51637 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51642 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51644 \begin_inset Newline newline
51648 \begin_inset Flex URL
51651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51653 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51661 \begin_layout Bibliography
51662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51663 LatexCommand bibitem
51670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51673 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51678 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51679 for Cyrillic languages:
51680 \begin_inset Newline newline
51684 \begin_inset Flex URL
51687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51689 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51697 \begin_layout Bibliography
51698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51699 LatexCommand bibitem
51706 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51709 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51714 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51716 \begin_inset Newline newline
51720 \begin_inset Flex URL
51723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51725 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51733 \begin_layout Bibliography
51734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51735 LatexCommand bibitem
51742 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51745 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51750 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51752 \begin_inset Newline newline
51756 \begin_inset Flex URL
51759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51761 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51769 \begin_layout Bibliography
51770 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51771 LatexCommand bibitem
51778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51781 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51786 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51788 \begin_inset Newline newline
51792 \begin_inset Flex URL
51795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51797 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51805 \begin_layout Standard
51806 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51840 \begin_inset Note Note
51843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51850 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51851 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51852 bibliography is the second one:
51860 \begin_layout Standard
51861 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51862 LatexCommand bibtex
51863 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51864 options "biblio/alphadin"
51871 \begin_layout Standard
51872 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51876 \begin_layout Standard
51880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51886 pagedeclaration}[1]{
51889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51895 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
51903 \begin_inset Note Note
51906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51907 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
51908 \begin_inset space ~
51912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51914 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
51926 \begin_layout Standard
51927 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51928 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51934 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51935 LatexCommand printindex